dnrops
/
gimp
mirror of https://github.com/GNOME/gimp.git
1
0
Fork 0
Code Issues Packages Projects Releases Wiki Activity

configure.in Updated Gimp-Help. See help/ChangeLog for details. 

2000-12-15  Michael Natterer  <mitch@gimp.org>

	* configure.in
	* help/*: Updated Gimp-Help. See help/ChangeLog for details.

	* app/channels_dialog.c
	* app/gdisplay.c
	* app/gradient.c
	* app/layers_dialog.c
	* app/menus.c
	* app/paths_dialog.c
	* app/preferences_dialog.c
	* app/resize.c: fixed menu paths.

	* plug-ins/helpbrowser/helpbrowser.c: load a special
	"undocumented_filter.html" page if a filter was not found.
	Adapted to the new help structure.

2000-12-15  Michael Natterer  <mitch@gimp.org>

	* makedummyhelpfile.sh
	* makeindex.sh: removed.

	* images/*: added some images.

	* help/*: Updated to the latest version of the gimp-help CVS module.

	This Version instoduces a bunch of new toplevel HTML files for
	general topics, an autogenerated index, TOC, glossary,
	an "image" directory on the "C" level, peace, love, and stuff...

	Thanks to all help writers: Prof, Bex, Piers, ...
This commit is contained in:
Michael Natterer 2000-12-15 03:47:24 +00:00 committed by Michael Natterer
parent b44620a31b
commit 06e409e0f7
476 changed files with 53565 additions and 13875 deletions
Show Stats Download Patch File Download Diff File Expand all files Collapse all files

18
ChangeLog
View File

@ -1,3 +1,21 @@
2000-12-15 Michael Natterer <mitch@gimp.org>
* configure.in
* help/*: Updated Gimp-Help. See help/ChangeLog for details.
* app/channels_dialog.c
* app/gdisplay.c
* app/gradient.c
* app/layers_dialog.c
* app/menus.c
* app/paths_dialog.c
* app/preferences_dialog.c
* app/resize.c: fixed menu paths.
* plug-ins/helpbrowser/helpbrowser.c: load a special
"undocumented_filter.html" page if a filter was not found.
Adapted to the new help structure.
2000-12-14 Sven Neumann <sven@gimp.org>
* app/nav_window.c: missed a place that needed the same fix for

2
app/channels_dialog.c
View File

@ -2656,7 +2656,7 @@ channels_dialog_edit_channel_query (ChannelWidget *channel_widget)
options->query_box =
gimp_dialog_new (_("Edit Channel Attributes"), "edit_channel_attributes",
gimp_standard_help_func,
"dialogs/channels/dialogs/edit_channel_attributes.html",
"dialogs/channels/edit_channel_attributes.html",
GTK_WIN_POS_MOUSE,
FALSE, TRUE, FALSE,

2
app/core/gimpprojection.c
View File

@ -1718,7 +1718,7 @@ gdisplay_set_menu_sensitivity (GDisplay *gdisp)
SET_SENSITIVE ("File/Save", gdisp && drawable);
SET_SENSITIVE ("File/Save As...", gdisp && drawable);
SET_SENSITIVE ("File/Revert", gdisp && gdisp->gimage->filename);
SET_SENSITIVE ("File/Revert...", gdisp && gdisp->gimage->filename);
SET_SENSITIVE ("File/Close", gdisp);
SET_SENSITIVE ("Edit", gdisp);

2
app/dialogs/preferences-dialog.c
View File

@ -1671,7 +1671,7 @@ prefs_cmd_callback (GtkWidget *widget,
_("Default Comment"),
GTK_CTREE (ctree),
_("Default Comment"),
"dialogs/preferences/default_comment.html",
"dialogs/preferences/new_file.html#default_comment",
top_insert,
&child_insert,
page_index);

6
app/dialogs/resize-dialog.c
View File

@ -193,12 +193,12 @@ resize_widget_new (ResizeType type,
case ResizeLayer:
wmclass = "resize_layer";
window_title = _("Set Layer Boundary Size");
help_page = "layers/dialogs/resize_layer.html";
help_page = "layers/dialogs/layer_boundary_size.html";
break;
case ResizeImage:
wmclass = "resize_image";
window_title = _("Set Canvas Size");
help_page = "dialogs/resize_image.html";
help_page = "dialogs/set_canvas_size.html";
break;
}
frame = gtk_frame_new (_("Size"));
@ -215,7 +215,7 @@ resize_widget_new (ResizeType type,
user_data, NULL, NULL, TRUE, FALSE,
_("Reset"), reset_callback,
resize, NULL, NULL, FALSE, TRUE,
resize, NULL, NULL, FALSE, FALSE,
_("Cancel"), cancel_cb ? cancel_cb : gtk_widget_destroy,
cancel_cb ? user_data : NULL,

2
app/display/gimpdisplay.c
View File

@ -1718,7 +1718,7 @@ gdisplay_set_menu_sensitivity (GDisplay *gdisp)
SET_SENSITIVE ("File/Save", gdisp && drawable);
SET_SENSITIVE ("File/Save As...", gdisp && drawable);
SET_SENSITIVE ("File/Revert", gdisp && gdisp->gimage->filename);
SET_SENSITIVE ("File/Revert...", gdisp && gdisp->gimage->filename);
SET_SENSITIVE ("File/Close", gdisp);
SET_SENSITIVE ("Edit", gdisp);

2
app/gdisplay.c
View File

@ -1718,7 +1718,7 @@ gdisplay_set_menu_sensitivity (GDisplay *gdisp)
SET_SENSITIVE ("File/Save", gdisp && drawable);
SET_SENSITIVE ("File/Save As...", gdisp && drawable);
SET_SENSITIVE ("File/Revert", gdisp && gdisp->gimage->filename);
SET_SENSITIVE ("File/Revert...", gdisp && gdisp->gimage->filename);
SET_SENSITIVE ("File/Close", gdisp);
SET_SENSITIVE ("Edit", gdisp);

4
app/gradient.c
View File

@ -907,7 +907,7 @@ gradient_editor_create (void)
gtk_widget_show (button);
button = ed_create_button (_("Save as POV-Ray"),
"dialogs/gradient_editor/save_as_pov_ray.html",
"dialogs/gradient_editor/save_as_povray.html",
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (ed_save_pov_callback),
NULL);
GTK_WIDGET_UNSET_FLAGS (button, GTK_RECEIVES_DEFAULT);
@ -1866,7 +1866,7 @@ ed_save_pov_callback (GtkWidget *widget,
/* Connect the "F1" help key */
gimp_help_connect_help_accel (window, gimp_standard_help_func,
"dialogs/gradient_editor/save_as_pov_ray.html");
"dialogs/gradient_editor/save_as_povray.html");
gtk_widget_show (window);
gtk_widget_set_sensitive (g_editor->shell, FALSE);

4
app/gradient_editor.c
View File

@ -907,7 +907,7 @@ gradient_editor_create (void)
gtk_widget_show (button);
button = ed_create_button (_("Save as POV-Ray"),
"dialogs/gradient_editor/save_as_pov_ray.html",
"dialogs/gradient_editor/save_as_povray.html",
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (ed_save_pov_callback),
NULL);
GTK_WIDGET_UNSET_FLAGS (button, GTK_RECEIVES_DEFAULT);
@ -1866,7 +1866,7 @@ ed_save_pov_callback (GtkWidget *widget,
/* Connect the "F1" help key */
gimp_help_connect_help_accel (window, gimp_standard_help_func,
"dialogs/gradient_editor/save_as_pov_ray.html");
"dialogs/gradient_editor/save_as_povray.html");
gtk_widget_show (window);
gtk_widget_set_sensitive (g_editor->shell, FALSE);

2
app/gui/channels-dialog.c
View File

@ -2656,7 +2656,7 @@ channels_dialog_edit_channel_query (ChannelWidget *channel_widget)
options->query_box =
gimp_dialog_new (_("Edit Channel Attributes"), "edit_channel_attributes",
gimp_standard_help_func,
"dialogs/channels/dialogs/edit_channel_attributes.html",
"dialogs/channels/edit_channel_attributes.html",
GTK_WIN_POS_MOUSE,
FALSE, TRUE, FALSE,

4
app/gui/gradient-editor.c
View File

@ -907,7 +907,7 @@ gradient_editor_create (void)
gtk_widget_show (button);
button = ed_create_button (_("Save as POV-Ray"),
"dialogs/gradient_editor/save_as_pov_ray.html",
"dialogs/gradient_editor/save_as_povray.html",
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (ed_save_pov_callback),
NULL);
GTK_WIDGET_UNSET_FLAGS (button, GTK_RECEIVES_DEFAULT);
@ -1866,7 +1866,7 @@ ed_save_pov_callback (GtkWidget *widget,
/* Connect the "F1" help key */
gimp_help_connect_help_accel (window, gimp_standard_help_func,
"dialogs/gradient_editor/save_as_pov_ray.html");
"dialogs/gradient_editor/save_as_povray.html");
gtk_widget_show (window);
gtk_widget_set_sensitive (g_editor->shell, FALSE);

2
app/gui/layers-dialog.c
View File

@ -3823,7 +3823,7 @@ layers_dialog_add_mask_query (Layer *layer)
options->query_box =
gimp_dialog_new (_("Add Mask Options"), "add_mask_options",
gimp_standard_help_func,
"dialogs/layers/add_mask.html",
"dialogs/layers/add_layer_mask.html",
GTK_WIN_POS_MOUSE,
FALSE, TRUE, FALSE,

26
app/gui/menus.c
View File

@ -210,7 +210,7 @@ static GimpItemFactoryEntry image_entries[] =
"file/dialogs/file_save.html", NULL },
{ { N_("/File/Save As..."), NULL, file_save_as_cmd_callback, 0 },
"file/dialogs/file_save.html", NULL },
{ { N_("/File/Revert"), NULL, file_revert_cmd_callback, 0 },
{ { N_("/File/Revert..."), NULL, file_revert_cmd_callback, 0 },
"file/revert.html", NULL },
{ { "/File/---", NULL, NULL, 0, "<Separator>" },
@ -623,7 +623,7 @@ static GimpItemFactoryEntry layers_entries[] =
{ { "/---", NULL, NULL, 0, "<Separator>" },
NULL, NULL },
{ { N_("/Layer Boundary Size..."), "<control>R", layers_dialog_resize_layer_callback, 0 },
"dialogs/resize_layer.html", NULL },
"dialogs/layer_boundary_size.html", NULL },
{ { N_("/Layer to Imagesize"), NULL, layers_dialog_resize_to_image_callback, 0 },
"layer_to_image_size.html", NULL },
{ { N_("/Scale Layer..."), "<control>S", layers_dialog_scale_layer_callback, 0 },
@ -641,7 +641,7 @@ static GimpItemFactoryEntry layers_entries[] =
{ { "/---", NULL, NULL, 0, "<Separator>" },
NULL, NULL },
{ { N_("/Add Layer Mask..."), NULL, layers_dialog_add_layer_mask_callback, 0 },
"dialogs/add_mask.html", NULL },
"dialogs/add_layer_mask.html", NULL },
{ { N_("/Apply Layer Mask"), NULL, layers_dialog_apply_layer_mask_callback, 0 },
"apply_mask.html", NULL },
{ { N_("/Delete Layer Mask"), NULL, layers_dialog_delete_layer_mask_callback, 0 },
@ -1462,14 +1462,20 @@ menus_item_key_press (GtkWidget *widget,
item_factory = (GtkItemFactory *) data;
active_menu_item = GTK_MENU_SHELL (widget)->active_menu_item;
/* first, check if the user tries to assign a shortcut to the help
* menu items and ignore it...
/* first, get the help page from the item
*/
if (active_menu_item)
{
help_page = (gchar *) gtk_object_get_data (GTK_OBJECT (active_menu_item),
"help_page");
}
/* For any key except F1, continue with the standard
* GtkItemFactory callback and assign a new shortcut, but don't
* assign a shortcut to the help menu entries...
*/
if (kevent->keyval != GDK_F1)
{
if (help_page &&
*help_page &&
item_factory == toolbox_factory &&
@ -1480,14 +1486,12 @@ menus_item_key_press (GtkWidget *widget,
"key_press_event");
return TRUE;
}
else
{
return FALSE;
}
}
/* ...otherwise, for any key except F1, continue with the standard
* GtkItemFactory callback and assign a new shortcut...
*/
if (kevent->keyval != GDK_F1)
return FALSE;
/* ...finally, if F1 was pressed over any menu, show it's help page...
*/
gtk_signal_emit_stop_by_name (GTK_OBJECT (widget), "key_press_event");

2
app/gui/paths-dialog.c
View File

@ -984,7 +984,7 @@ paths_dialog_edit_path_query (GtkWidget *widget)
qbox = gimp_query_string_box (_("Edit Path Attributes"),
gimp_standard_help_func,
"paths/dialogs/rename_path.html",
"paths/dialogs/edit_path_attributes.html",
_("Enter a new name for the path"),
text,
NULL, NULL,

2
app/gui/preferences-dialog.c
View File

@ -1671,7 +1671,7 @@ prefs_cmd_callback (GtkWidget *widget,
_("Default Comment"),
GTK_CTREE (ctree),
_("Default Comment"),
"dialogs/preferences/default_comment.html",
"dialogs/preferences/new_file.html#default_comment",
top_insert,
&child_insert,
page_index);

6
app/gui/resize-dialog.c
View File

@ -193,12 +193,12 @@ resize_widget_new (ResizeType type,
case ResizeLayer:
wmclass = "resize_layer";
window_title = _("Set Layer Boundary Size");
help_page = "layers/dialogs/resize_layer.html";
help_page = "layers/dialogs/layer_boundary_size.html";
break;
case ResizeImage:
wmclass = "resize_image";
window_title = _("Set Canvas Size");
help_page = "dialogs/resize_image.html";
help_page = "dialogs/set_canvas_size.html";
break;
}
frame = gtk_frame_new (_("Size"));
@ -215,7 +215,7 @@ resize_widget_new (ResizeType type,
user_data, NULL, NULL, TRUE, FALSE,
_("Reset"), reset_callback,
resize, NULL, NULL, FALSE, TRUE,
resize, NULL, NULL, FALSE, FALSE,
_("Cancel"), cancel_cb ? cancel_cb : gtk_widget_destroy,
cancel_cb ? user_data : NULL,

2
app/layers_dialog.c
View File

@ -3823,7 +3823,7 @@ layers_dialog_add_mask_query (Layer *layer)
options->query_box =
gimp_dialog_new (_("Add Mask Options"), "add_mask_options",
gimp_standard_help_func,
"dialogs/layers/add_mask.html",
"dialogs/layers/add_layer_mask.html",
GTK_WIN_POS_MOUSE,
FALSE, TRUE, FALSE,

26
app/menus.c
View File

@ -210,7 +210,7 @@ static GimpItemFactoryEntry image_entries[] =
"file/dialogs/file_save.html", NULL },
{ { N_("/File/Save As..."), NULL, file_save_as_cmd_callback, 0 },
"file/dialogs/file_save.html", NULL },
{ { N_("/File/Revert"), NULL, file_revert_cmd_callback, 0 },
{ { N_("/File/Revert..."), NULL, file_revert_cmd_callback, 0 },
"file/revert.html", NULL },
{ { "/File/---", NULL, NULL, 0, "<Separator>" },
@ -623,7 +623,7 @@ static GimpItemFactoryEntry layers_entries[] =
{ { "/---", NULL, NULL, 0, "<Separator>" },
NULL, NULL },
{ { N_("/Layer Boundary Size..."), "<control>R", layers_dialog_resize_layer_callback, 0 },
"dialogs/resize_layer.html", NULL },
"dialogs/layer_boundary_size.html", NULL },
{ { N_("/Layer to Imagesize"), NULL, layers_dialog_resize_to_image_callback, 0 },
"layer_to_image_size.html", NULL },
{ { N_("/Scale Layer..."), "<control>S", layers_dialog_scale_layer_callback, 0 },
@ -641,7 +641,7 @@ static GimpItemFactoryEntry layers_entries[] =
{ { "/---", NULL, NULL, 0, "<Separator>" },
NULL, NULL },
{ { N_("/Add Layer Mask..."), NULL, layers_dialog_add_layer_mask_callback, 0 },
"dialogs/add_mask.html", NULL },
"dialogs/add_layer_mask.html", NULL },
{ { N_("/Apply Layer Mask"), NULL, layers_dialog_apply_layer_mask_callback, 0 },
"apply_mask.html", NULL },
{ { N_("/Delete Layer Mask"), NULL, layers_dialog_delete_layer_mask_callback, 0 },
@ -1462,14 +1462,20 @@ menus_item_key_press (GtkWidget *widget,
item_factory = (GtkItemFactory *) data;
active_menu_item = GTK_MENU_SHELL (widget)->active_menu_item;
/* first, check if the user tries to assign a shortcut to the help
* menu items and ignore it...
/* first, get the help page from the item
*/
if (active_menu_item)
{
help_page = (gchar *) gtk_object_get_data (GTK_OBJECT (active_menu_item),
"help_page");
}
/* For any key except F1, continue with the standard
* GtkItemFactory callback and assign a new shortcut, but don't
* assign a shortcut to the help menu entries...
*/
if (kevent->keyval != GDK_F1)
{
if (help_page &&
*help_page &&
item_factory == toolbox_factory &&
@ -1480,14 +1486,12 @@ menus_item_key_press (GtkWidget *widget,
"key_press_event");
return TRUE;
}
else
{
return FALSE;
}
}
/* ...otherwise, for any key except F1, continue with the standard
* GtkItemFactory callback and assign a new shortcut...
*/
if (kevent->keyval != GDK_F1)
return FALSE;
/* ...finally, if F1 was pressed over any menu, show it's help page...
*/
gtk_signal_emit_stop_by_name (GTK_OBJECT (widget), "key_press_event");

26
app/menus/menus.c
View File

@ -210,7 +210,7 @@ static GimpItemFactoryEntry image_entries[] =
"file/dialogs/file_save.html", NULL },
{ { N_("/File/Save As..."), NULL, file_save_as_cmd_callback, 0 },
"file/dialogs/file_save.html", NULL },
{ { N_("/File/Revert"), NULL, file_revert_cmd_callback, 0 },
{ { N_("/File/Revert..."), NULL, file_revert_cmd_callback, 0 },
"file/revert.html", NULL },
{ { "/File/---", NULL, NULL, 0, "<Separator>" },
@ -623,7 +623,7 @@ static GimpItemFactoryEntry layers_entries[] =
{ { "/---", NULL, NULL, 0, "<Separator>" },
NULL, NULL },
{ { N_("/Layer Boundary Size..."), "<control>R", layers_dialog_resize_layer_callback, 0 },
"dialogs/resize_layer.html", NULL },
"dialogs/layer_boundary_size.html", NULL },
{ { N_("/Layer to Imagesize"), NULL, layers_dialog_resize_to_image_callback, 0 },
"layer_to_image_size.html", NULL },
{ { N_("/Scale Layer..."), "<control>S", layers_dialog_scale_layer_callback, 0 },
@ -641,7 +641,7 @@ static GimpItemFactoryEntry layers_entries[] =
{ { "/---", NULL, NULL, 0, "<Separator>" },
NULL, NULL },
{ { N_("/Add Layer Mask..."), NULL, layers_dialog_add_layer_mask_callback, 0 },
"dialogs/add_mask.html", NULL },
"dialogs/add_layer_mask.html", NULL },
{ { N_("/Apply Layer Mask"), NULL, layers_dialog_apply_layer_mask_callback, 0 },
"apply_mask.html", NULL },
{ { N_("/Delete Layer Mask"), NULL, layers_dialog_delete_layer_mask_callback, 0 },
@ -1462,14 +1462,20 @@ menus_item_key_press (GtkWidget *widget,
item_factory = (GtkItemFactory *) data;
active_menu_item = GTK_MENU_SHELL (widget)->active_menu_item;
/* first, check if the user tries to assign a shortcut to the help
* menu items and ignore it...
/* first, get the help page from the item
*/
if (active_menu_item)
{
help_page = (gchar *) gtk_object_get_data (GTK_OBJECT (active_menu_item),
"help_page");
}
/* For any key except F1, continue with the standard
* GtkItemFactory callback and assign a new shortcut, but don't
* assign a shortcut to the help menu entries...
*/
if (kevent->keyval != GDK_F1)
{
if (help_page &&
*help_page &&
item_factory == toolbox_factory &&
@ -1480,14 +1486,12 @@ menus_item_key_press (GtkWidget *widget,
"key_press_event");
return TRUE;
}
else
{
return FALSE;
}
}
/* ...otherwise, for any key except F1, continue with the standard
* GtkItemFactory callback and assign a new shortcut...
*/
if (kevent->keyval != GDK_F1)
return FALSE;
/* ...finally, if F1 was pressed over any menu, show it's help page...
*/
gtk_signal_emit_stop_by_name (GTK_OBJECT (widget), "key_press_event");

2
app/paths_dialog.c
View File

@ -984,7 +984,7 @@ paths_dialog_edit_path_query (GtkWidget *widget)
qbox = gimp_query_string_box (_("Edit Path Attributes"),
gimp_standard_help_func,
"paths/dialogs/rename_path.html",
"paths/dialogs/edit_path_attributes.html",
_("Enter a new name for the path"),
text,
NULL, NULL,

2
app/preferences_dialog.c
View File

@ -1671,7 +1671,7 @@ prefs_cmd_callback (GtkWidget *widget,
_("Default Comment"),
GTK_CTREE (ctree),
_("Default Comment"),
"dialogs/preferences/default_comment.html",
"dialogs/preferences/new_file.html#default_comment",
top_insert,
&child_insert,
page_index);

6
app/resize.c
View File

@ -193,12 +193,12 @@ resize_widget_new (ResizeType type,
case ResizeLayer:
wmclass = "resize_layer";
window_title = _("Set Layer Boundary Size");
help_page = "layers/dialogs/resize_layer.html";
help_page = "layers/dialogs/layer_boundary_size.html";
break;
case ResizeImage:
wmclass = "resize_image";
window_title = _("Set Canvas Size");
help_page = "dialogs/resize_image.html";
help_page = "dialogs/set_canvas_size.html";
break;
}
frame = gtk_frame_new (_("Size"));
@ -215,7 +215,7 @@ resize_widget_new (ResizeType type,
user_data, NULL, NULL, TRUE, FALSE,
_("Reset"), reset_callback,
resize, NULL, NULL, FALSE, TRUE,
resize, NULL, NULL, FALSE, FALSE,
_("Cancel"), cancel_cb ? cancel_cb : gtk_widget_destroy,
cancel_cb ? user_data : NULL,

4
app/widgets/gimpgradienteditor.c
View File

@ -907,7 +907,7 @@ gradient_editor_create (void)
gtk_widget_show (button);
button = ed_create_button (_("Save as POV-Ray"),
"dialogs/gradient_editor/save_as_pov_ray.html",
"dialogs/gradient_editor/save_as_povray.html",
GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC (ed_save_pov_callback),
NULL);
GTK_WIDGET_UNSET_FLAGS (button, GTK_RECEIVES_DEFAULT);
@ -1866,7 +1866,7 @@ ed_save_pov_callback (GtkWidget *widget,
/* Connect the "F1" help key */
gimp_help_connect_help_accel (window, gimp_standard_help_func,
"dialogs/gradient_editor/save_as_pov_ray.html");
"dialogs/gradient_editor/save_as_povray.html");
gtk_widget_show (window);
gtk_widget_set_sensitive (g_editor->shell, FALSE);

26
app/widgets/gimpitemfactory.c
View File

@ -210,7 +210,7 @@ static GimpItemFactoryEntry image_entries[] =
"file/dialogs/file_save.html", NULL },
{ { N_("/File/Save As..."), NULL, file_save_as_cmd_callback, 0 },
"file/dialogs/file_save.html", NULL },
{ { N_("/File/Revert"), NULL, file_revert_cmd_callback, 0 },
{ { N_("/File/Revert..."), NULL, file_revert_cmd_callback, 0 },
"file/revert.html", NULL },
{ { "/File/---", NULL, NULL, 0, "<Separator>" },
@ -623,7 +623,7 @@ static GimpItemFactoryEntry layers_entries[] =
{ { "/---", NULL, NULL, 0, "<Separator>" },
NULL, NULL },
{ { N_("/Layer Boundary Size..."), "<control>R", layers_dialog_resize_layer_callback, 0 },
"dialogs/resize_layer.html", NULL },
"dialogs/layer_boundary_size.html", NULL },
{ { N_("/Layer to Imagesize"), NULL, layers_dialog_resize_to_image_callback, 0 },
"layer_to_image_size.html", NULL },
{ { N_("/Scale Layer..."), "<control>S", layers_dialog_scale_layer_callback, 0 },
@ -641,7 +641,7 @@ static GimpItemFactoryEntry layers_entries[] =
{ { "/---", NULL, NULL, 0, "<Separator>" },
NULL, NULL },
{ { N_("/Add Layer Mask..."), NULL, layers_dialog_add_layer_mask_callback, 0 },
"dialogs/add_mask.html", NULL },
"dialogs/add_layer_mask.html", NULL },
{ { N_("/Apply Layer Mask"), NULL, layers_dialog_apply_layer_mask_callback, 0 },
"apply_mask.html", NULL },
{ { N_("/Delete Layer Mask"), NULL, layers_dialog_delete_layer_mask_callback, 0 },
@ -1462,14 +1462,20 @@ menus_item_key_press (GtkWidget *widget,
item_factory = (GtkItemFactory *) data;
active_menu_item = GTK_MENU_SHELL (widget)->active_menu_item;
/* first, check if the user tries to assign a shortcut to the help
* menu items and ignore it...
/* first, get the help page from the item
*/
if (active_menu_item)
{
help_page = (gchar *) gtk_object_get_data (GTK_OBJECT (active_menu_item),
"help_page");
}
/* For any key except F1, continue with the standard
* GtkItemFactory callback and assign a new shortcut, but don't
* assign a shortcut to the help menu entries...
*/
if (kevent->keyval != GDK_F1)
{
if (help_page &&
*help_page &&
item_factory == toolbox_factory &&
@ -1480,14 +1486,12 @@ menus_item_key_press (GtkWidget *widget,
"key_press_event");
return TRUE;
}
else
{
return FALSE;
}
}
/* ...otherwise, for any key except F1, continue with the standard
* GtkItemFactory callback and assign a new shortcut...
*/
if (kevent->keyval != GDK_F1)
return FALSE;
/* ...finally, if F1 was pressed over any menu, show it's help page...
*/
gtk_signal_emit_stop_by_name (GTK_OBJECT (widget), "key_press_event");

1
configure.in
View File

@ -819,6 +819,7 @@ help/C/image/image/mode/Makefile
help/C/image/image/transforms/Makefile
help/C/image/select/Makefile
help/C/image/view/Makefile
help/C/images/Makefile
help/C/layers/Makefile
help/C/layers/stack/Makefile
help/C/open/Makefile

20
help/C/Makefile.am
View File

@ -1,14 +1,24 @@
## Process this file with automake to produce Makefile.in
SUBDIRS = dialogs tools layers channels paths toolbox image open save filters file
SUBDIRS = dialogs tools layers channels paths toolbox image images open save filters file
helpdatadir = $(gimpdatadir)/help/C
helpdata_DATA = \
contents.html \
index.html \
welcome.html \
modes.html
command_line.html \
contents.html \
file_formats.html \
gimp_license.html \
gimp_remote.html \
gimptool.html \
glossary.html \
index.html \
introduction.html \
keyboard_shortcuts.html \
ln7.html \
main_interface.html \
using_gimp.html \
why_gimp.html
EXTRA_DIST = $(helpdata_DATA)

170
help/C/channels/channel_to_selection.html
View File

@ -1,31 +1,139 @@
<!doctype html public "-//w3c//dtd html 4.0 transitional//en">
<html>
<head>
<META HTTP-EQUIV="Content-Type" CONTENT="text/html; charset=iso-8859-1">
<title>Help Page for channel_to_selection</title>
</head>
<body text="#000000" bgcolor="#FFFFFF" link="#0000FF"
vlink="#FF0000" alink="#000088">
<table width="100%" cellspacing="1" cellpadding="1">
<tr bgcolor="black">
<td width="100%" align="center">
<font size="+2" color="white">channel_to_selection help page</font>
</td>
</tr>
<tr bgcolor="white" >
<td width="100%" align="left">
<p>
<a href="index.html">Index</a><p>
(/channels/channel_to_selection.html)<p>
Sorry but the help file for channel_to_selection is not yet done.
<p>
/Karin & Olof
<p>
</td>
</tr>
</table>
</body>
</html>
<HTML
><HEAD
><TITLE
>Channel to Selection</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.49"><LINK
REL="HOME"
TITLE="GIMP User Manual"
HREF="../contents.html"><LINK
REL="UP"
TITLE="Channels"
HREF="../channels/index.html"><LINK
REL="PREVIOUS"
TITLE="Duplicate Channel"
HREF="../channels/duplicate_channel.html"><LINK
REL="NEXT"
TITLE="Delete Channel"
HREF="../channels/delete_channel.html"></HEAD
><BODY
CLASS="SECT1"
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
TEXT="#000000"
><DIV
CLASS="NAVHEADER"
><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TH
COLSPAN="3"
ALIGN="center"
>GIMP User Manual</TH
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../channels/duplicate_channel.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="80%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="bottom"
>Chapter 6. Channels</TD
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../channels/delete_channel.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="CHANNELS-CHANNEL-TO-SELECTION"
>Channel to Selection</A
></H1
><A
NAME="AEN1532"
></A
><P
> Turns the mask of a custom channel into a selection based
on the intensity of its grayscale mask.
</P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../channels/duplicate_channel.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../contents.html"
>Home</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../channels/delete_channel.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
>Duplicate Channel</TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../channels/index.html"
>Up</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
>Delete Channel</TD
></TR
></TABLE
></DIV
></BODY
></HTML
>

186
help/C/channels/delete_channel.html
View File

@ -1,31 +1,155 @@
<!doctype html public "-//w3c//dtd html 4.0 transitional//en">
<html>
<head>
<META HTTP-EQUIV="Content-Type" CONTENT="text/html; charset=iso-8859-1">
<title>Help Page for delete_channel</title>
</head>
<body text="#000000" bgcolor="#FFFFFF" link="#0000FF"
vlink="#FF0000" alink="#000088">
<table width="100%" cellspacing="1" cellpadding="1">
<tr bgcolor="black">
<td width="100%" align="center">
<font size="+2" color="white">delete_channel help page</font>
</td>
</tr>
<tr bgcolor="white" >
<td width="100%" align="left">
<p>
<a href="index.html">Index</a><p>
(/channels/delete_channel.html)<p>
Sorry but the help file for delete_channel is not yet done.
<p>
/Karin & Olof
<p>
</td>
</tr>
</table>
</body>
</html>
<HTML
><HEAD
><TITLE
>Delete Channel</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.49"><LINK
REL="HOME"
TITLE="GIMP User Manual"
HREF="../contents.html"><LINK
REL="UP"
TITLE="Channels"
HREF="../channels/index.html"><LINK
REL="PREVIOUS"
TITLE="Channel to Selection"
HREF="../channels/channel_to_selection.html"><LINK
REL="NEXT"
TITLE="Edit Channel Attributes"
HREF="../dialogs/channels/edit_channel_attributes.html"></HEAD
><BODY
CLASS="SECT1"
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
TEXT="#000000"
><DIV
CLASS="NAVHEADER"
><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TH
COLSPAN="3"
ALIGN="center"
>GIMP User Manual</TH
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../channels/channel_to_selection.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="80%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="bottom"
>Chapter 6. Channels</TD
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../dialogs/channels/edit_channel_attributes.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="CHANNELS-DELETE-CHANNEL"
>Delete Channel</A
></H1
><A
NAME="AEN1537"
></A
><P
> Deletes the active channel. The channel below the deleted
channel will become the active channel. You can't delete a standard
Red, Green, or Blue channel. This is the same as clicking the
<SPAN
CLASS="GUIICON"
> <SPAN
CLASS="INLINEMEDIAOBJECT"
><IMG
SRC="../../images/delete_icon.png"
></IMG
></SPAN
>
</SPAN
>
icon.
</P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../channels/channel_to_selection.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../contents.html"
>Home</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../dialogs/channels/edit_channel_attributes.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
>Channel to Selection</TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../channels/index.html"
>Up</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
><SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Edit Channel Attributes</SPAN
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
></DIV
></BODY
></HTML
>

187
help/C/channels/duplicate_channel.html
View File

@ -1,31 +1,156 @@
<!doctype html public "-//w3c//dtd html 4.0 transitional//en">
<html>
<head>
<META HTTP-EQUIV="Content-Type" CONTENT="text/html; charset=iso-8859-1">
<title>Help Page for duplicate_channel</title>
</head>
<body text="#000000" bgcolor="#FFFFFF" link="#0000FF"
vlink="#FF0000" alink="#000088">
<table width="100%" cellspacing="1" cellpadding="1">
<tr bgcolor="black">
<td width="100%" align="center">
<font size="+2" color="white">duplicate_channel help page</font>
</td>
</tr>
<tr bgcolor="white" >
<td width="100%" align="left">
<p>
<a href="index.html">Index</a><p>
(/channels/duplicate_channel.html)<p>
Sorry but the help file for duplicate_channel is not yet done.
<p>
/Karin & Olof
<p>
</td>
</tr>
</table>
</body>
</html>
<HTML
><HEAD
><TITLE
>Duplicate Channel</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.49"><LINK
REL="HOME"
TITLE="GIMP User Manual"
HREF="../contents.html"><LINK
REL="UP"
TITLE="Channels"
HREF="../channels/index.html"><LINK
REL="PREVIOUS"
TITLE="Lower Channel"
HREF="../channels/lower_channel.html"><LINK
REL="NEXT"
TITLE="Channel to Selection"
HREF="../channels/channel_to_selection.html"></HEAD
><BODY
CLASS="SECT1"
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
TEXT="#000000"
><DIV
CLASS="NAVHEADER"
><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TH
COLSPAN="3"
ALIGN="center"
>GIMP User Manual</TH
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../channels/lower_channel.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="80%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="bottom"
>Chapter 6. Channels</TD
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../channels/channel_to_selection.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="CHANNELS-DUPLICATE-CHANNEL"
>Duplicate Channel</A
></H1
><A
NAME="AEN1522"
></A
><P
> Creates a copy of the active channel and places it above
the copied channel. The new path will have <SPAN
CLASS="QUOTE"
>"copy"</SPAN
>
added to the name of the copied channel as its name. This function
is the same as clicking the
<SPAN
CLASS="GUIICON"
> <SPAN
CLASS="INLINEMEDIAOBJECT"
><IMG
SRC="../../images/duplicate_icon.png"
></IMG
></SPAN
>
</SPAN
>
icon.
</P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../channels/lower_channel.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../contents.html"
>Home</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../channels/channel_to_selection.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
>Lower Channel</TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../channels/index.html"
>Up</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
>Channel to Selection</TD
></TR
></TABLE
></DIV
></BODY
></HTML
>

246
help/C/channels/index.html
View File

@ -1,37 +1,209 @@
<!doctype html public "-//w3c//dtd html 4.0 transitional//en">
<html>
<head>
<META HTTP-EQUIV="Content-Type" CONTENT="text/html; charset=iso-8859-1">
<title>Index for channels</title>
</head>
<body text="#000000" bgcolor="#FFFFFF" link="#0000FF"
vlink="#FF0000" alink="#000088">
<table width="100%" cellspacing="1" cellpadding="1">
<tr bgcolor="black">
<td width="100%" align="center">
<font size="+2" color="white">channels Index</font>
</td>
</tr>
<tr bgcolor="white" >
<td width="100%" align="left">
<p>
(/channels/index.html)<p>
<a href="../index.html">Top index</a><p>
<p>Topics in this directory:<p>
<a href="channel_to_selection.html">channel_to_selection</a><br>
<a href="channels.html">channels</a><br>
<a href="delete_channel.html">delete_channel</a><br>
<a href="duplicate_channel.html">duplicate_channel</a><br>
<a href="lower_channel.html">lower_channel</a><br>
<a href="raise_channel.html">raise_channel</a><br>
<p>
/Karin & Olof
<p>
</td>
</tr>
</table>
</body>
</html>
<HTML
><HEAD
><TITLE
>Channels</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.49"><LINK
REL="HOME"
TITLE="GIMP User Manual"
HREF="../contents.html"><LINK
REL="PREVIOUS"
TITLE="Edit Layer Attributes"
HREF="../dialogs/layers/edit_layer_attributes.html"><LINK
REL="NEXT"
TITLE="The Channels Dialog"
HREF="../dialogs/channels/channels.html"></HEAD
><BODY
CLASS="CHAPTER"
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
TEXT="#000000"
><DIV
CLASS="NAVHEADER"
><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TH
COLSPAN="3"
ALIGN="center"
>GIMP User Manual</TH
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../dialogs/layers/edit_layer_attributes.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="80%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="bottom"
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../dialogs/channels/channels.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="CHAPTER"
><H1
><A
NAME="CHANNELS-CHANNELS-CHAPTER"
>Chapter 6. Channels</A
></H1
><DIV
CLASS="TOC"
><DL
><DT
><B
>Table of Contents</B
></DT
><DT
><A
HREF="../channels/index.html#CHANNELS-CHANNELS-INTRODUCTION"
>Channels Introduction</A
></DT
><DT
><A
HREF="../dialogs/channels/channels.html"
>The <SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Channels</SPAN
> Dialog</A
></DT
><DT
><A
HREF="../dialogs/channels/new_channel.html"
>The <SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>New Channel</SPAN
> Dialog</A
></DT
><DT
><A
HREF="../channels/raise_channel.html"
>Raise Channel</A
></DT
><DT
><A
HREF="../channels/lower_channel.html"
>Lower Channel</A
></DT
><DT
><A
HREF="../channels/duplicate_channel.html"
>Duplicate Channel</A
></DT
><DT
><A
HREF="../channels/channel_to_selection.html"
>Channel to Selection</A
></DT
><DT
><A
HREF="../channels/delete_channel.html"
>Delete Channel</A
></DT
><DT
><A
HREF="../dialogs/channels/edit_channel_attributes.html"
><SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Edit Channel Attributes</SPAN
></A
></DT
></DL
></DIV
><A
NAME="AEN1447"
></A
><DIV
CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="CHANNELS-CHANNELS-INTRODUCTION"
>Channels Introduction</A
></H1
><A
NAME="AEN1451"
></A
><P
> In this chapter we'll explain to you how you can work with channels.
</P
></DIV
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../dialogs/layers/edit_layer_attributes.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../contents.html"
>Home</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../dialogs/channels/channels.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
>Edit Layer Attributes</TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
>&nbsp;</TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
>The <SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Channels</SPAN
> Dialog</TD
></TR
></TABLE
></DIV
></BODY
></HTML
>

184
help/C/channels/lower_channel.html
View File

@ -1,31 +1,153 @@
<!doctype html public "-//w3c//dtd html 4.0 transitional//en">
<html>
<head>
<META HTTP-EQUIV="Content-Type" CONTENT="text/html; charset=iso-8859-1">
<title>Help Page for lower_channel</title>
</head>
<body text="#000000" bgcolor="#FFFFFF" link="#0000FF"
vlink="#FF0000" alink="#000088">
<table width="100%" cellspacing="1" cellpadding="1">
<tr bgcolor="black">
<td width="100%" align="center">
<font size="+2" color="white">lower_channel help page</font>
</td>
</tr>
<tr bgcolor="white" >
<td width="100%" align="left">
<p>
<a href="index.html">Index</a><p>
(/channels/lower_channel.html)<p>
Sorry but the help file for lower_channel is not yet done.
<p>
/Karin & Olof
<p>
</td>
</tr>
</table>
</body>
</html>
<HTML
><HEAD
><TITLE
>Lower Channel</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.49"><LINK
REL="HOME"
TITLE="GIMP User Manual"
HREF="../contents.html"><LINK
REL="UP"
TITLE="Channels"
HREF="../channels/index.html"><LINK
REL="PREVIOUS"
TITLE="Raise Channel"
HREF="../channels/raise_channel.html"><LINK
REL="NEXT"
TITLE="Duplicate Channel"
HREF="../channels/duplicate_channel.html"></HEAD
><BODY
CLASS="SECT1"
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
TEXT="#000000"
><DIV
CLASS="NAVHEADER"
><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TH
COLSPAN="3"
ALIGN="center"
>GIMP User Manual</TH
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../channels/raise_channel.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="80%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="bottom"
>Chapter 6. Channels</TD
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../channels/duplicate_channel.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="CHANNELS-LOWER-CHANNEL"
>Lower Channel</A
></H1
><A
NAME="AEN1513"
></A
><P
> Channels are stacked on top of each of each other in the same way
as layers. You can lower them using this function. Channels can
also be lowered by dragging the channel down in the channels dialog,
or by using the
<SPAN
CLASS="GUIICON"
> <SPAN
CLASS="INLINEMEDIAOBJECT"
><IMG
SRC="../../images/lower_layer_icon.png"
></IMG
></SPAN
>
</SPAN
>
icons.
</P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../channels/raise_channel.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../contents.html"
>Home</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../channels/duplicate_channel.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
>Raise Channel</TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../channels/index.html"
>Up</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
>Duplicate Channel</TD
></TR
></TABLE
></DIV
></BODY
></HTML
>

187
help/C/channels/raise_channel.html
View File

@ -1,31 +1,156 @@
<!doctype html public "-//w3c//dtd html 4.0 transitional//en">
<html>
<head>
<META HTTP-EQUIV="Content-Type" CONTENT="text/html; charset=iso-8859-1">
<title>Help Page for raise_channel</title>
</head>
<body text="#000000" bgcolor="#FFFFFF" link="#0000FF"
vlink="#FF0000" alink="#000088">
<table width="100%" cellspacing="1" cellpadding="1">
<tr bgcolor="black">
<td width="100%" align="center">
<font size="+2" color="white">raise_channel help page</font>
</td>
</tr>
<tr bgcolor="white" >
<td width="100%" align="left">
<p>
<a href="index.html">Index</a><p>
(/channels/raise_channel.html)<p>
Sorry but the help file for raise_channel is not yet done.
<p>
/Karin & Olof
<p>
</td>
</tr>
</table>
</body>
</html>
<HTML
><HEAD
><TITLE
>Raise Channel</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.49"><LINK
REL="HOME"
TITLE="GIMP User Manual"
HREF="../contents.html"><LINK
REL="UP"
TITLE="Channels"
HREF="../channels/index.html"><LINK
REL="PREVIOUS"
TITLE="The New Channel Dialog"
HREF="../dialogs/channels/new_channel.html"><LINK
REL="NEXT"
TITLE="Lower Channel"
HREF="../channels/lower_channel.html"></HEAD
><BODY
CLASS="SECT1"
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
TEXT="#000000"
><DIV
CLASS="NAVHEADER"
><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TH
COLSPAN="3"
ALIGN="center"
>GIMP User Manual</TH
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../dialogs/channels/new_channel.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="80%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="bottom"
>Chapter 6. Channels</TD
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../channels/lower_channel.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="CHANNELS-RAISE-CHANNEL"
>Raise Channel</A
></H1
><A
NAME="AEN1504"
></A
><P
> Channels are stacked on top of each of each other in the same way
as layers. You can raise them using this function. Channels can
also be raised by dragging the channel up in the channels dialog
or by using the
<SPAN
CLASS="GUIICON"
> <SPAN
CLASS="INLINEMEDIAOBJECT"
><IMG
SRC="../../images/raise_layer_icon.png"
></IMG
></SPAN
>
</SPAN
>
icons.
</P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../dialogs/channels/new_channel.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../contents.html"
>Home</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../channels/lower_channel.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
>The <SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>New Channel</SPAN
> Dialog</TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../channels/index.html"
>Up</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
>Lower Channel</TD
></TR
></TABLE
></DIV
></BODY
></HTML
>

435
help/C/command_line.html Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,435 @@
<HTML
><HEAD
><TITLE
>Command Line Options</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.49"><LINK
REL="HOME"
TITLE="GIMP User Manual"
HREF="contents.html"><LINK
REL="PREVIOUS"
TITLE="Keyboard Shortcuts"
HREF="keyboard_shortcuts.html"><LINK
REL="NEXT"
TITLE="GIMP Tool"
HREF="gimptool.html"></HEAD
><BODY
CLASS="APPENDIX"
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
TEXT="#000000"
><DIV
CLASS="NAVHEADER"
><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TH
COLSPAN="3"
ALIGN="center"
>GIMP User Manual</TH
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="keyboard_shortcuts.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="80%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="bottom"
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="gimptool.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="APPENDIX"
><H1
><A
NAME="COMMAND-LINE"
>Appendix B. Command Line Options</A
></H1
><DIV
CLASS="TOC"
><DL
><DT
><B
>Table of Contents</B
></DT
><DT
><A
HREF="command_line.html#AEN4203"
>GIMP</A
></DT
><DT
><A
HREF="gimptool.html"
>GIMP Tool</A
></DT
><DT
><A
HREF="gimp_remote.html"
><SPAN
CLASS="APPLICATION"
>GIMP Remote</SPAN
></A
></DT
></DL
></DIV
><A
NAME="AEN4201"
></A
><DIV
CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN4203"
>GIMP</A
></H1
><P
> When you launch <SPAN
CLASS="APPLICATION"
>GIMP</SPAN
>, it will often be
from a graphical menu where you simply click on the
<SPAN
CLASS="APPLICATION"
>GIMP</SPAN
> entry. This usually launches
<SPAN
CLASS="APPLICATION"
>GIMP</SPAN
> in its default form without any
images loaded. If you launch <SPAN
CLASS="APPLICATION"
>GIMP</SPAN
> from
a console, or edit the command used to launch it from the menu,
you can pass several options to it. These are in the format:
<B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>gimp [options ... ] [files ... ]</B
>
</P
><P
> <P
></P
><DL
><P
><B
><SPAN
CLASS="APPLICATION"
>GIMP</SPAN
> Options</B
></P
><DT
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>-h, --help</B
></DT
><DD
><P
> Displays a list of available options, and gives a terse
description of each one.
</P
></DD
><DT
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>-v, --version</B
></DT
><DD
><P
> Prints the version number of the installed
<SPAN
CLASS="APPLICATION"
>GIMP</SPAN
>.
</P
></DD
><DT
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>-b, --batch &lt;commands&gt;</B
></DT
><DD
><P
> Runs <SPAN
CLASS="APPLICATION"
>GIMP</SPAN
> in batch
(non-interactive) mode. Can someone explain how this
works please!!
</P
></DD
><DT
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>-g, --gimprc &lt;gimprc&gt;</B
></DT
><DD
><P
> Use an alternative <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>gimprc</TT
>
(<SPAN
CLASS="APPLICATION"
>GIMP</SPAN
> settings file) instead of the
default which is usually located at
<TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>~/gimp-1.1/gimprc</TT
>. This is useful
where plug-in paths or machine specifications may be different.
</P
></DD
><DT
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>-n, --no-interface</B
></DT
><DD
><P
> Run without a user interface.
</P
></DD
><DT
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>-r, --restore-session</B
></DT
><DD
><P
> Attempt to restore a saved session. This will start
<SPAN
CLASS="APPLICATION"
>GIMP</SPAN
> with the various dialogs
as they were in the saved state.
</P
></DD
><DT
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>--no-data</B
></DT
><DD
><P
> Start <SPAN
CLASS="APPLICATION"
>GIMP</SPAN
> without loading
patterns, gradients, palettes and brushes. This
significantly reduces the startup time, and is often
useful when using <SPAN
CLASS="APPLICATION"
>GIMP</SPAN
> in
non-interactive situations.
</P
></DD
><DT
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>--verbose</B
></DT
><DD
><P
> Prints startup messages to the console, showing all the
settings files which are parsed and the modules
loaded. This is often useful in debugging situations.
</P
></DD
><DT
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>--no-splash</B
></DT
><DD
><P
> Do not show the splash screen. This significantly
decreases the load time, although you will not see the
progress bar from the splash screen. This automatically
implies <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>--verbose</B
>.
</P
></DD
><DT
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>--no-splash-image</B
></DT
><DD
><P
> Do not show the splash screen image as part of the splash
screen. Only shows text information in the splash
screen. The progress indicator is still visible. This
decreases <SPAN
CLASS="APPLICATION"
>GIMP</SPAN
>'s load time.
</P
></DD
><DT
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>--no-shm</B
></DT
><DD
><P
> Do not use shared memory between
<SPAN
CLASS="APPLICATION"
>GIMP</SPAN
> and its plug-ins. Instead
of using shared memory, <SPAN
CLASS="APPLICATION"
>GIMP</SPAN
>
will send data via pipe. This will result in slower
performance than using shared memory.
</P
></DD
><DT
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>--no-xshm</B
></DT
><DD
><P
> Do not use the X Shared Memory extension. If
<SPAN
CLASS="APPLICATION"
>GIMP</SPAN
> is being displayed on a
remote X server, this probably needs to be enabled. It is
also useful for any X server that doesn't properly support
the X shared memory extension. This will result in slower
performance than with X shared memory enabled.
</P
></DD
><DT
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>--display &lt;display&gt;</B
></DT
><DD
><P
> Use the specified X display.
</P
></DD
><DT
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>--console-messages</B
></DT
><DD
><P
> Do not pop-up dialog boxes on errors or warning, print
them to the console instead.
</P
></DD
><DT
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>--debug-handlers</B
></DT
><DD
><P
> Enable debug handlers which turns on the stack trace prompt
for all signals, not just fatal ones.
</P
></DD
><DT
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>--system-gimprc &lt;gimprc&gt;</B
></DT
><DD
><P
> Use an alternate system-wide gimprc file.
</P
></DD
></DL
>
</P
></DIV
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="keyboard_shortcuts.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="contents.html"
>Home</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="gimptool.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
>Keyboard Shortcuts</TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
>&nbsp;</TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
>GIMP Tool</TD
></TR
></TABLE
></DIV
></BODY
></HTML
>

2235
help/C/contents.html
View File

File diff suppressed because it is too large Load Diff

75
help/C/dialogs/Makefile.am
View File

@ -5,43 +5,44 @@ SUBDIRS = layers channels paths palette_editor gradient_editor display_filters c
helpdatadir = $(gimpdatadir)/help/C/dialogs
helpdata_DATA = \
about.html \
border_selection.html \
brush_editor.html \
brush_selection.html \
convert_to_indexed.html \
copy_named.html \
cut_named.html \
device_status.html \
document_index.html \
edit_qmask_attributes.html \
error_console.html \
feather_selection.html \
file_new.html \
file_open.html \
file_save.html \
gradient_selection.html \
grow_selection.html \
help.html \
index.html \
indexed_palette.html \
info_window.html \
input_devices.html \
layers_and_channels.html \
module_browser.html \
navigation_window.html \
offset.html \
palette_selection.html \
paste_named.html \
pattern_selection.html \
really_close.html \
really_quit.html \
scale_image.html \
scale_layer_warn.html \
set_canvas_size.html \
shrink_selection.html \
tip_of_the_day.html \
tool_options.html \
about.html \
border_selection.html \
brush_editor.html \
brush_selection.html \
convert_to_indexed.html \
copy_named.html \
cut_named.html \
device_status.html \
document_index.html \
edit_qmask_attributes.html \
error_console.html \
feather_selection.html \
file_new.html \
file_open.html \
file_save.html \
gradient_selection.html \
grow_selection.html \
help.html \
index.html \
indexed_palette.html \
info_window.html \
input_devices.html \
layers_and_channels.html \
module_browser.html \
navigation_window.html \
offset.html \
palette_selection.html \
paste_named.html \
pattern_selection.html \
really_close.html \
really_quit.html \
revert_image.html \
scale_image.html \
scale_layer_warn.html \
set_canvas_size.html \
shrink_selection.html \
tip_of_the_day.html \
tool_options.html \
undo_history.html
EXTRA_DIST = $(helpdata_DATA)

181
help/C/dialogs/about.html
View File

@ -1,24 +1,157 @@
<!doctype html public "-//w3c//dtd html 4.0 transitional//en">
<HTML>
<HEAD>
<META HTTP-EQUIV="Content-Type" CONTENT="text/html; charset=iso-8859-1">
<TITLE>About Dialog</TITLE>
</HEAD>
<BODY text="#000000" bgcolor="#FFFFFF" link="#0000FF" vlink="#FF0000" alink="#000088">
<TABLE width="100%" cellspacing="1" cellpadding="1">
<TR bgcolor="black">
<TD width="100%" align="center"><FONT size="+2" color="white">About
Dialog</FONT></TD>
</TR>
<TR bgcolor="white" >
<TD width="100%" align="left"><P>
<P>
The About dialog shows which Gimp version that you are using and also in
a random order the people that have contributed to the Gimp project.
To clear the dialog, click anywhere on it.
<P>
<A href="index.html">Index</A>
</TD>
</TR>
</TABLE>
</BODY></HTML>
<HTML
><HEAD
><TITLE
>About Dialog</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.49"><LINK
REL="HOME"
TITLE="GIMP User Manual"
HREF="../contents.html"><LINK
REL="UP"
TITLE="ToolBox"
HREF="../toolbox/index.html"><LINK
REL="PREVIOUS"
TITLE="Tip of the Day"
HREF="../dialogs/tip_of_the_day.html"><LINK
REL="NEXT"
TITLE="Image"
HREF="../image/index.html"></HEAD
><BODY
CLASS="SECT1"
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
TEXT="#000000"
><DIV
CLASS="NAVHEADER"
><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TH
COLSPAN="3"
ALIGN="center"
>GIMP User Manual</TH
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../dialogs/tip_of_the_day.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="80%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="bottom"
>Chapter 3. ToolBox</TD
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../image/index.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="DIALOGS-ABOUT"
><SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>About</SPAN
> Dialog</A
></H1
><A
NAME="AEN607"
></A
><P
> The <SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>About</SPAN
> dialog shows which
<SPAN
CLASS="APPLICATION"
>GIMP</SPAN
> version you are using and
also, in random order, the people who have contributed to the
<SPAN
CLASS="APPLICATION"
>GIMP</SPAN
> project. To close the dialog,
click anywhere on it.
</P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../dialogs/tip_of_the_day.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../contents.html"
>Home</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../image/index.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
><SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Tip of the Day</SPAN
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../toolbox/index.html"
>Up</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
>Image</TD
></TR
></TABLE
></DIV
></BODY
></HTML
>

176
help/C/dialogs/border_selection.html
View File

@ -1,23 +1,153 @@
<!doctype html public "-//w3c//dtd html 4.0 transitional//en">
<HTML>
<HEAD>
<META HTTP-EQUIV="Content-Type" CONTENT="text/html; charset=iso-8859-1">
<TITLE>Border</TITLE>
</HEAD>
<BODY text="#000000" bgcolor="#FFFFFF" link="#0000FF" vlink="#FF0000" alink="#000088">
<TABLE width="100%" cellspacing="1" cellpadding="1">
<TR bgcolor="black">
<TD width="100%" align="center"><FONT size="+2" color="white">Border</FONT></TD>
</TR>
<TR bgcolor="white" >
<TD width="100%" align="left"><P>
<P>
Border creates a new selection surrounding the outline of the old one. The
new selection is a hollow border area or frame that covers an area both outside
and inside the original selection edge.
<P>
<A href="index.html">Index</A>
</TD>
</TR>
</TABLE>
</BODY></HTML>
<HTML
><HEAD
><TITLE
>Border Selection</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.49"><LINK
REL="HOME"
TITLE="GIMP User Manual"
HREF="../contents.html"><LINK
REL="UP"
TITLE="Image"
HREF="../image/index.html"><LINK
REL="PREVIOUS"
TITLE="Grow Selection"
HREF="../dialogs/grow_selection.html"><LINK
REL="NEXT"
TITLE="Save Selection to Channel"
HREF="../image/select/save_to_channel.html"></HEAD
><BODY
CLASS="SECT1"
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
TEXT="#000000"
><DIV
CLASS="NAVHEADER"
><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TH
COLSPAN="3"
ALIGN="center"
>GIMP User Manual</TH
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../dialogs/grow_selection.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="80%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="bottom"
>Chapter 4. Image</TD
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../image/select/save_to_channel.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="DIALOGS-BORDER-SELECTION"
><SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Border Selection</SPAN
></A
></H1
><A
NAME="AEN904"
></A
><P
> <SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Border</SPAN
> creates a new selection surrounding
the outline of the old one. The new selection is a hollow border
area or frame in the specified width that covers an area both
outside and inside the original selection edge .
</P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../dialogs/grow_selection.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../contents.html"
>Home</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../image/select/save_to_channel.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
><SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Grow Selection</SPAN
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../image/index.html"
>Up</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
><SPAN
CLASS="GUIMENUITEM"
>Save Selection to Channel</SPAN
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
></DIV
></BODY
></HTML
>

306
help/C/dialogs/brush_editor.html
View File

@ -1,52 +1,254 @@
<!doctype html public "-//w3c//dtd html 4.0 transitional//en">
<HTML>
<HEAD>
<META HTTP-EQUIV="Content-Type" CONTENT="text/html; charset=iso-8859-1">
<TITLE>Brush Editor</TITLE>
</HEAD>
<BODY text="#000000" bgcolor="#FFFFFF" link="#0000FF" vlink="#FF0000" alink="#000088">
<TABLE width="100%" cellspacing="1" cellpadding="1">
<TR bgcolor="black">
<TD width="100%" align="center"><FONT size="+2" color="white">Brush
Editor</FONT></TD>
</TR>
<TR bgcolor="white" >
<TD width="100%" align="left"><P>
<P>
The Brush Editor dialog allows you to make alterations to brushes.
At the top of the dialog, you can see the name of the brush (a new
brush will be called "Untitled"). This name can be edited to change the
brush name. If you choose a name which is the same as another brush,
Gimp will suffix "#<em>x</em>" (where <em>x</em> is a number).
<P>
Below the title, you can see a preview of how the final brush will
look. If you resize the brush to a size larger than the preview area,
the preveiw will be scaled, and the scale factor shown below it as a
ratio, such as 2:1 for 50% zoomed out.
<H4>
Settings
</H4>
The remainder of the dialog controls how the brush will be look.
The Radius controls the distance from the center of the brush to the
furthest edge in pixels. The radius of a brush is 100 pixels.
<P>
The Hardness slider controls how much the brush fades towards it's
edges. A value closer to 1 will give a sharp edge, and closer to 0 will
give a fuzzy, blured effect.
<P>
The Aspect Ratio defines the diameter vertical as a ratio against the
horizontal diameter. A value of 1.0 will give a round brush since this
means that the horizontal diameter is 1x the vertical. The maximum
value is 20, where the horizontal diameter is 20x the vertical, which
gives a very squashed eliptical brush.
<P>
The final setting is Angle which is used when the aspect ratio is
more than 1.0. The angle can be between 0 and 180 degrees, which works
in an anti-clockwise direction.
<P>
<A href="index.html">Index</A>
</TD>
</TR>
</TABLE>
</BODY>
</HTML>
<HTML
><HEAD
><TITLE
> Brush Editor </TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.49"><LINK
REL="HOME"
TITLE="GIMP User Manual"
HREF="../contents.html"><LINK
REL="UP"
TITLE="Dialogs"
HREF="../dialogs/index.html"><LINK
REL="PREVIOUS"
TITLE="The Brush Selection Dialog"
HREF="../dialogs/brush_selection.html"><LINK
REL="NEXT"
TITLE=" The Gradient Selection Dialog"
HREF="../dialogs/gradient_selection.html"></HEAD
><BODY
CLASS="SECT1"
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
TEXT="#000000"
><DIV
CLASS="NAVHEADER"
><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TH
COLSPAN="3"
ALIGN="center"
>GIMP User Manual</TH
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../dialogs/brush_selection.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="80%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="bottom"
>Chapter 12. Dialogs</TD
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../dialogs/gradient_selection.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="DIALOGS-BRUSH-EDITOR"
><SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Brush Editor</SPAN
></A
></H1
><A
NAME="AEN2413"
></A
><P
> The <SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Brush Editor</SPAN
> dialog allows you to make
alterations to brushes. At the top of the dialog, you can see the
name of the brush (a new brush will be called
<SPAN
CLASS="GUILABEL"
>Untitled</SPAN
>). This name can be edited to change
the brush name. If you choose a name which is the same as another
brush, <SPAN
CLASS="APPLICATION"
>GIMP</SPAN
> will suffix the name with
#<TT
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
><I
>x</I
></TT
>.<A
NAME="AEN2420"
HREF="#FTN.AEN2420"
>[1]</A
>
</P
><P
> Below the title, you can see a preview of the final brush. If you
size the brush to a size larger than the preview
area, the preview will be scaled and the scale factor shown below
it as a ratio, such as 2:1 for 50% zoomed out.
</P
><DIV
CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="BRUSHEDITOR-SETTINGS"
>Settings</A
></H2
><P
> The remainder of the dialog controls how the brush will look.
The <SPAN
CLASS="GUIBUTTON"
>Radius</SPAN
> controls the distance from the
center of the brush to the furthest edge in pixels. The maximum
radius of a brush is 100 pixels.
</P
><P
> The <SPAN
CLASS="GUIBUTTON"
>Hardness</SPAN
> slider controls how much the
brush fades towards its edges. A value closer to 1 will give a
sharp edge and closer to 0 will give a fuzzy, blurred effect.
</P
><P
> The <SPAN
CLASS="GUIBUTTON"
>Aspect Ratio</SPAN
> defines the vertical
diameter in a ratio to the horizontal diameter. A value of 1.0
will give a round brush since this means that the horizontal
diameter is the same as the vertical. The maximum value is 20
which gives a horizontal diameter twenty times larger than the
vertical, resulting in a very squashed, elliptical brush.
</P
><P
> The final setting is <SPAN
CLASS="GUIBUTTON"
>Angle</SPAN
> which is used
when the aspect ratio is more than 1.0. The angle can be between
0 and 180 degrees, measured counterclockwise.
</P
></DIV
></DIV
><H3
CLASS="FOOTNOTES"
>Notes</H3
><TABLE
BORDER="0"
CLASS="FOOTNOTES"
WIDTH="100%"
><TR
><TD
ALIGN="LEFT"
VALIGN="TOP"
WIDTH="5%"
><A
NAME="FTN.AEN2420"
HREF="../dialogs/brush_editor.html#AEN2420"
>[1]</A
></TD
><TD
ALIGN="LEFT"
VALIGN="TOP"
WIDTH="95%"
><P
> where
<TT
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
><I
>x</I
></TT
> is a number.</P
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
><DIV
CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../dialogs/brush_selection.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../contents.html"
>Home</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../dialogs/gradient_selection.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
>The <SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Brush Selection</SPAN
> Dialog</TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../dialogs/index.html"
>Up</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
>The <SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Gradient Selection</SPAN
> Dialog</TD
></TR
></TABLE
></DIV
></BODY
></HTML
>

423
help/C/dialogs/brush_selection.html
View File

@ -1,103 +1,320 @@
<!doctype html public "-//w3c//dtd html 4.0 transitional//en">
<HTML>
<HEAD>
<META HTTP-EQUIV="Content-Type" CONTENT="text/html; charset=iso-8859-1">
<TITLE>The Brush Selection Dialog</TITLE>
</HEAD>
<BODY text="#000000" bgcolor="#FFFFFF" link="#0000FF" vlink="#FF0000" alink="#000088">
<TABLE width="100%" cellspacing="1" cellpadding="1">
<TR bgcolor="black">
<TD width="100%" align="center"><FONT size="+2" color="white">The Brush Selection
Dialog</FONT></TD>
</TR>
<TR bgcolor="white" >
<TD width="100%" align="left"><P>
<P>
It's in this dialog you choose what brush you want to use, and the settings
you want to apply to the brush. The dialog displays all the available brushes.
You may also notice some unusual brushes, like colored brushes (pixmap brushes),
brushes with a red triangle in the right corner a so called "Image House"
brush , brushes with artistic text, little flourishes or doodles, etc.
<P>
All of those brushes are relatively easy to create in Gimp and save them
in the appropriate format. Gimp also provides you with a <A
href="brush_editor.html">brush editor</A>
where you can create and edit brushes (you can only edit brushes that are
created in the brush editor).
<H4>
Preview and Brush Information
</H4>
<P>
You will see that some of the brushes in the dialog has a little + sign.
The + sign is indicating that the brush preview is scaled to fit, i.e. the
brush is larger in reality. To view the real size of the brush, click and
hold on the brush square and the real size brush will appear (and disappear
when you release the mouse).
<P>
When you choose a brush the name and the size of the brush will appear in
the brush dialog. The brush size is measured in pixels.
<H4>
Settings
</H4>
<P>
Spacing is the distance between your brush marks. If you set the spacing
to 100 the brushmarks will be like a bead of pearls. If you set the spacing
to zero, the brushmarks will create a solid, brush-shaped line. If the spacing
is higher than 100 the brushmarks will form a dotted line. Note: It is mostly
not useful to set the spacing to zero since the brush (most notably fuzzy
ones) will look unnatural.
<H4>
Pixmap Brushes
</H4>
<P>
Pixmap brushes are small images (with or without color) that can be used
as a brush. Since the brush is a image you can't alter it's color, i.e the
color setting in the toolbox will not apply to this image. Note: That if
you use color as a pressure sensitivity when you paint you will be able to
change the color of the pixmap brush. For information how to create and save
a Pixmap Brush please see the <A HREF="../save/filters/gpb.html">Gimp Pixmap
Brush</A> page.
<H4>
Image Hose Brushes
</H4>
<P>
The Image Hose brush is a specialized pixmap brush, you will notice that
the brush is a Image Hose by the little red triangle in the bottom right
corner. The difference between a Pixmap brush and a Image Hose is that the
Image Hose contains one or several Pixmap brushes.
<P>
The preview of an Image Hose is also a bit special, since an Image hose is
built up of several Pixmap brushes you will see all brushes displayed as
a small animation when you invoke the preview function (press and hold on
the brush preview).
<P>
Since the Image Hose is built up of several Pixmap brushes there are functions
to control which of the brushes you will paint with. The functions are
incremental, angular, random, velocity, pressure, xtilt and ytilt. To give
you an idea say that the Image Hose is built up of several arrows and has
angular as control function. Then you will be able to paint arrows that follows
your movements when you draw. Note: That you can't edit those function they
are built into the Image Hose brush file when it was created. For further
explanation of how to create Image Hoses please see the
<A HREF="../save/filters/gpb.html">Gimp Pixmap Brush</A> page.
<H4>
New, Edit and Delete Brushes
</H4>
<P>
You can create new brushes by clicking on the new button. This will bring
up the <A HREF="../dialogs/brush_editor.html">Brush Editor</A> dialog where
you can create your brush. You can edit brushes created in the brush dialog,
invoking edit on brush of that type will once again bring up the Brush Editor
dialog where you can alter your brush. Naturally you can also delete brushes
created in the Brush Editor, just click on Delete and they will vanish.
<H3>
Additional Information
</H3>
<P>
Default Keyboard Shortcut: Ctrl+Shift+B
<P>
<A href="index.html">Index</A>
</TD>
</TR>
</TABLE>
</BODY></HTML>
<HTML
><HEAD
><TITLE
>The Brush Selection Dialog</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.49"><LINK
REL="HOME"
TITLE="GIMP User Manual"
HREF="../contents.html"><LINK
REL="UP"
TITLE="Dialogs"
HREF="../dialogs/index.html"><LINK
REL="PREVIOUS"
TITLE="Directories"
HREF="../dialogs/preferences/directories.html"><LINK
REL="NEXT"
TITLE=" Brush Editor "
HREF="../dialogs/brush_editor.html"></HEAD
><BODY
CLASS="SECT1"
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
TEXT="#000000"
><DIV
CLASS="NAVHEADER"
><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TH
COLSPAN="3"
ALIGN="center"
>GIMP User Manual</TH
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../dialogs/preferences/directories.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="80%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="bottom"
>Chapter 12. Dialogs</TD
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../dialogs/brush_editor.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="DIALOGS-BRUSH-SELECTION"
>The <SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Brush Selection</SPAN
> Dialog</A
></H1
><A
NAME="AEN2377"
></A
><P
> In this dialog you choose what brush you want to use
and the <A
HREF="../dialogs/brush_selection.html#BRUSHSELECTION-SETTINGS"
>settings</A
> you
want to apply to the brush. The dialog displays all the available
brushes. You may also notice some of
<SPAN
CLASS="APPLICATION"
><SPAN
CLASS="ACRONYM"
>GIMP</SPAN
></SPAN
>'s special
features like colored brushes (pixmap brushes), brushes with a red
triangle in the right corner (so-called <SPAN
CLASS="QUOTE"
>"Image Hose"</SPAN
>
brushes), brushes with artistic text, little flourishes and
doodles, etc.
</P
><P
> All of those brushes are relatively easy to create in
<SPAN
CLASS="APPLICATION"
>GIMP</SPAN
> and save in the appropriate
format. <SPAN
CLASS="APPLICATION"
>GIMP</SPAN
> also provides you with a
<A
HREF="../dialogs/brush_editor.html"
>brush editor</A
>
where you can create and edit brushes. <A
NAME="AEN2388"
HREF="#FTN.AEN2388"
>[1]</A
>
</P
><DIV
CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="PREVIEW"
>Preview and Brush Information</A
></H2
><P
> You will see that some of the brushes in the dialog have a
little <SPAN
CLASS="GUIICON"
>+</SPAN
> sign. The <SPAN
CLASS="GUIICON"
>+</SPAN
> sign
is indicating that the brush preview is scaled to fit the space.
To view the real size of the brush, click and hold on the
<SPAN
CLASS="GUIBUTTON"
>brush square</SPAN
> and the real size brush will
appear (and disappear when you release the mouse).
</P
><P
> When you choose a brush, the name and the size of the brush will
appear in the <SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>brush dialog</SPAN
>. The brush
size is measured in pixels.
</P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="BRUSHSELECTION-SETTINGS"
>Settings</A
></H2
><P
> <SPAN
CLASS="GUILABEL"
>Spacing</SPAN
> is the distance between your brush
marks. If you set the spacing to 100, the brushmarks will be
like a string of pearls. If you set the spacing to zero, the
brushmarks will create a solid, brush-shaped line. If the
spacing is higher than 100, the brushmarks will form a dotted
line.
</P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="PIXMAPBRUSHES"
>Pixmap Brushes</A
></H2
><P
> Pixmap brushes are small images that can be used as a brush.
Since the brush is an image, you can't alter its color. The
color setting in the toolbox will not apply to this image.
<DIV
CLASS="NOTE"
><P
></P
><TABLE
CLASS="NOTE"
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="25"
ALIGN="CENTER"
VALIGN="TOP"
><IMG
SRC="../../images/note.gif"
HSPACE="5"
ALT="Note"></TD
><TD
ALIGN="LEFT"
VALIGN="TOP"
><P
> If you use color as a pressure sensitivity when you paint
you will be able to change the color of the pixmap brush.
For information on how to create and save a Pixmap Brush
please see the <A
HREF="../filters/gpb.html"
> <SPAN
CLASS="APPLICATION"
>GIMP</SPAN
> Pixmap Brush</A
> page.
</P
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
></DIV
>
</P
></DIV
></DIV
><H3
CLASS="FOOTNOTES"
>Notes</H3
><TABLE
BORDER="0"
CLASS="FOOTNOTES"
WIDTH="100%"
><TR
><TD
ALIGN="LEFT"
VALIGN="TOP"
WIDTH="5%"
><A
NAME="FTN.AEN2388"
HREF="../dialogs/brush_selection.html#AEN2388"
>[1]</A
></TD
><TD
ALIGN="LEFT"
VALIGN="TOP"
WIDTH="95%"
><P
> you can
only edit brushes that are created in the <SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>brush
editor</SPAN
> </P
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
><DIV
CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../dialogs/preferences/directories.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../contents.html"
>Home</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../dialogs/brush_editor.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
>Directories</TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../dialogs/index.html"
>Up</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
><SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Brush Editor</SPAN
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
></DIV
></BODY
></HTML
>

5
help/C/dialogs/channels/Makefile.am
View File

@ -3,9 +3,8 @@
helpdatadir = $(gimpdatadir)/help/C/dialogs/channels
helpdata_DATA = \
channels.html \
edit_channel_attributes.html \
index.html \
channels.html \
edit_channel_attributes.html \
new_channel.html
EXTRA_DIST = $(helpdata_DATA)

348
help/C/dialogs/channels/channels.html
View File

@ -1,69 +1,279 @@
<!doctype html public "-//w3c//dtd html 4.0 transitional//en">
<HTML>
<HEAD>
<META HTTP-EQUIV="Content-Type" CONTENT="text/html; charset=iso-8859-1">
<TITLE>The Channels Dialog</TITLE>
</HEAD>
<BODY text="#000000" bgcolor="#FFFFFF" link="#0000FF" vlink="#FF0000" alink="#000088">
<TABLE width="100%" cellspacing="1" cellpadding="1">
<TR bgcolor="black">
<TD width="100%" align="center"><FONT size="+2" color="white">The Channels
Dialog</FONT></TD>
</TR>
<TR bgcolor="white" >
<TD width="100%" align="left"><P>
<P>
The Channels tab displays the three RGB channels, showing the current red,
green or blue color values of each pixel in your image. The RGB channel
thumbnails are grayscale representations of each color channel, where white
represents 100% color, and black represents no color.
<P>
The RGB channels each have an eye icon, so you can look at your image in
a single color channel. Click off the eye icon in the Blue and Green channels,
so that only the Red channel is visible. Bright red in the red channel is
the equivalent of a maximum red value for that pixel; black means that the
pixel has no red at all in it. If all three channels have maximum values
for an area, that area is white.
<P>
The RGB channels are always active when a layer is active, and they display
the color values of all visible layers, not just the active one. Unlike layers,
the RGB channels can all be active at the same time.You can also choose to
work in one or two specific color channels, by clicking on the appropriate
channels to activate the ones you want and deactivate the ones you don't
want.
<P>
You can create new channels by clicking the on the new button. This will
bring up the <A HREF="new_channel.html">New Channel</A> dialog where you
can set name, color and fill amount of the new channel. If you want to alter
the values later on you just dubbel click on the channel which will bring
up the <A HREF="edit_channel_attributes.html">Edit Channel Attributes</A>
dialog. Normally you don't work with extra channels but they can be very
handy to create and store selections within.
<P>
If you right click on the layer name you will be able to access the layer
menu, with in the layer menu you have access to several other layer commands,
see <A HREF="../../channels/index.html">Index</A>.
<P>
An experienced user can also use them to crate patterns and to create advanced
colored images with. The channel stack tools are more or less only useful
when you work with those kind of images.
<H4>
Selections and Channels
</H4>
<P>
You are able to store a selection as a channel with the
<A HREF="../../image/select/save_to_channel.html"><CODE>right-click|Select|Save
To Channel</CODE></A> command. If you do so a new channel will be created,
and in that channel you can paint, and erase etc. When you have altered your
channel you can turn it into a selection again. To turn it into a selection
you just click on the
<A HREF="../../channels/channel_to_selection.html">Channel To Selection</A>
button. This is a very convenient way to alter selections and not to talk
about store several selections. In fact you can create selections from scratch
by creating a new channel, alter it and then apply Channel To Selection.
<P>
<A href="index.html">Index</A>
</TD>
</TR>
</TABLE>
</BODY></HTML>
<HTML
><HEAD
><TITLE
>The Channels Dialog</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.49"><LINK
REL="HOME"
TITLE="GIMP User Manual"
HREF="../../contents.html"><LINK
REL="UP"
TITLE="Channels"
HREF="../../channels/index.html"><LINK
REL="PREVIOUS"
TITLE="Channels"
HREF="../../channels/index.html"><LINK
REL="NEXT"
TITLE="The New Channel Dialog"
HREF="../../dialogs/channels/new_channel.html"></HEAD
><BODY
CLASS="SECT1"
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
TEXT="#000000"
><DIV
CLASS="NAVHEADER"
><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TH
COLSPAN="3"
ALIGN="center"
>GIMP User Manual</TH
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../../channels/index.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="80%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="bottom"
>Chapter 6. Channels</TD
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../../dialogs/channels/new_channel.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="DIALOGS-CHANNELS"
>The <SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Channels</SPAN
> Dialog</A
></H1
><A
NAME="AEN1457"
></A
><P
> The <SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Channels</SPAN
> tab displays the three
<SPAN
CLASS="ABBREV"
>RGB</SPAN
> channels, showing the current red, green, or
blue color values of each pixel in your image. The
<SPAN
CLASS="ABBREV"
>RGB</SPAN
> channel thumbnails are grayscale
representations of each color channel with white representing 100%
color and black representing no color.
</P
><P
> The <SPAN
CLASS="ABBREV"
>RGB</SPAN
> channels each have an
<SPAN
CLASS="GUIICON"
>eye</SPAN
> icon, so you can look at your image in a
single color channel. Click off the <SPAN
CLASS="GUIICON"
>eye</SPAN
> icon in
the Blue and Green channels, so that only the Red channel is
visible. Bright red in the red channel is the equivalent of a
maximum red value for that pixel; black means that the pixel has
no red at all in it. You will see bright red for areas that are
white or bright red. If all three channels have maximum values
for an area, that area is white in the actual image.
</P
><P
> The <SPAN
CLASS="ABBREV"
>RGB</SPAN
> channels are always active when a layer
is active. They display the color values of all visible layers,
not just the active one. Unlike layers, the <SPAN
CLASS="ABBREV"
>RGB</SPAN
>
channels can all be active at the same time. You can also choose
to work in one or two specific color channels by clicking on the
appropriate channels to activate the ones you want and deactivate
the ones you don't want.
</P
><P
> You can create new channels by clicking the
<SPAN
CLASS="GUIBUTTON"
>New</SPAN
> button. This will bring up the
<A
HREF="../../dialogs/channels/new_channel.html"
> <SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>New Channel</SPAN
></A
>
dialog where you can set name, color, and fill amount of the new
channel. If you want to alter the values later on, you just double
click on the channel which will bring up the
<A
HREF="../../dialogs/channels/edit_channel_attributes.html"
> <SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Edit Channel Attributes</SPAN
></A
> dialog.
Normally you don't work with extra channels, but they can be very
handy for creating and storing selections.
</P
><P
> If you <SPAN
CLASS="MOUSEBUTTON"
>right</SPAN
> click on the layer name
you will be able to access the layer menu. In the layer menu you
have access to several other layer commands, see
<A
HREF="../../channels/index.html"
>Chapter 6</A
>.
</P
><P
> An experienced user can also use them to create patterns and
advanced colored images. The channel stack tools are more or less
only useful when you work with those kind of images.
</P
><DIV
CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="SELECTIONSANDCHANNELS"
>Selections and Channels</A
></H2
><P
> You are able to store a selection as a channel with the
<SPAN
CLASS="MOUSEBUTTON"
>right</SPAN
>click <SPAN
CLASS="GUIMENU"
>Select</SPAN
>
<A
HREF="../../image/select/save_to_channel.html"
> <SPAN
CLASS="GUIMENUITEM"
>Save To Channel</SPAN
></A
>
command. This creates a new channel where you can paint, erase,
and perform any other drawing function. The altered channel can
be turned into a selection again by clicking on the
<A
HREF="../../channels/channel_to_selection.html"
> <SPAN
CLASS="GUIBUTTON"
>Channel To Selection</SPAN
></A
> button.
This is a very convenient way to alter selections and store
several selections. In fact, you can create selections from
scratch by creating a new channel, altering it, and then
applying <SPAN
CLASS="GUIBUTTON"
>Channel To Selection</SPAN
>.
</P
></DIV
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../../channels/index.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../../contents.html"
>Home</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../../dialogs/channels/new_channel.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
>Channels</TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../../channels/index.html"
>Up</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
>The <SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>New Channel</SPAN
> Dialog</TD
></TR
></TABLE
></DIV
></BODY
></HTML
>

182
help/C/dialogs/channels/edit_channel_attributes.html
View File

@ -1,27 +1,155 @@
<!doctype html public "-//w3c//dtd html 4.0 transitional//en">
<HTML>
<HEAD>
<META HTTP-EQUIV="Content-Type" CONTENT="text/html; charset=iso-8859-1">
<TITLE>Edit Channel Attributes</TITLE>
</HEAD>
<BODY text="#000000" bgcolor="#FFFFFF" link="#0000FF" vlink="#FF0000" alink="#000088">
<TABLE width="100%" cellspacing="1" cellpadding="1">
<TR bgcolor="black">
<TD width="100%" align="center"><FONT size="+2" color="white">Edit Channel
Attributes</FONT></TD>
</TR>
<TR bgcolor="white" >
<TD width="100%" align="left"><P>
<P>
Allows you to alter the name, color and fill opacity of the channel.
<P>
The fill opacity is mainly useful if you want to set how much of the underlaying
image you want to see, when you work with channel that you later on will
turn into a selection. The advanced user will also use it to "control" ink
opacity when she works with e.g duotones.
<P>
<A href="index.html">Index</A>
</TD>
</TR>
</TABLE>
</BODY></HTML>
<HTML
><HEAD
><TITLE
>Edit Channel Attributes</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.49"><LINK
REL="HOME"
TITLE="GIMP User Manual"
HREF="../../contents.html"><LINK
REL="UP"
TITLE="Channels"
HREF="../../channels/index.html"><LINK
REL="PREVIOUS"
TITLE="Delete Channel"
HREF="../../channels/delete_channel.html"><LINK
REL="NEXT"
TITLE="Paths"
HREF="../../paths/index.html"></HEAD
><BODY
CLASS="SECT1"
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
TEXT="#000000"
><DIV
CLASS="NAVHEADER"
><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TH
COLSPAN="3"
ALIGN="center"
>GIMP User Manual</TH
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../../channels/delete_channel.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="80%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="bottom"
>Chapter 6. Channels</TD
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../../paths/index.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="DIALOGS-CHANNELS-EDIT-CHANNEL-ATTRIBUTES"
><SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Edit Channel Attributes</SPAN
></A
></H1
><A
NAME="AEN1547"
></A
><P
> Allows you to alter the name, color and fill opacity of the
channel.
</P
><P
> The <SPAN
CLASS="GUIBUTTON"
>fill opacity</SPAN
> is useful for setting
how visible the underlying image is when you work with a channel
that will later be converted to a selection. The advanced user
will also use it to <SPAN
CLASS="QUOTE"
>"control"</SPAN
> ink opacity when he
works with things like duotones.
</P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../../channels/delete_channel.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../../contents.html"
>Home</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../../paths/index.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
>Delete Channel</TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../../channels/index.html"
>Up</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
>Paths</TD
></TR
></TABLE
></DIV
></BODY
></HTML
>

34
help/C/dialogs/channels/index.html
View File

@ -1,34 +0,0 @@
<!doctype html public "-//w3c//dtd html 4.0 transitional//en">
<html>
<head>
<META HTTP-EQUIV="Content-Type" CONTENT="text/html; charset=iso-8859-1">
<title>Index for channels</title>
</head>
<body text="#000000" bgcolor="#FFFFFF" link="#0000FF"
vlink="#FF0000" alink="#000088">
<table width="100%" cellspacing="1" cellpadding="1">
<tr bgcolor="black">
<td width="100%" align="center">
<font size="+2" color="white">channels Index</font>
</td>
</tr>
<tr bgcolor="white" >
<td width="100%" align="left">
<p>
(/dialogs/channels/index.html)<p>
<a href="../index.html">Top index</a><p>
<p>Topics in this directory:<p>
<a href="channels.html">channels</a><br>
<a href="edit_channel_attributes.html">edit_channel_attributes</a><br>
<a href="new_channel.html">new_channel</a><br>
<p>
/Karin & Olof
<p>
</td>
</tr>
</table>
</body>
</html>

221
help/C/dialogs/channels/new_channel.html
View File

@ -1,28 +1,193 @@
<!doctype html public "-//w3c//dtd html 4.0 transitional//en">
<HTML>
<HEAD>
<META HTTP-EQUIV="Content-Type" CONTENT="text/html; charset=iso-8859-1">
<TITLE>The New Channel Dialog</TITLE>
</HEAD>
<BODY text="#000000" bgcolor="#FFFFFF" link="#0000FF" vlink="#FF0000" alink="#000088">
<TABLE width="100%" cellspacing="1" cellpadding="1">
<TR bgcolor="black">
<TD width="100%" align="center"><FONT size="+2" color="white">The New Channel
Dialog</FONT></TD>
</TR>
<TR bgcolor="white" >
<TD width="100%" align="left"><P>
<P>
Allows you to set the name, color and fill opacity of the channel you are
about to create.
<P>
The fill opacity is mainly useful if you want to set how much of the underlaying
image you want to see, when you work with channel that you later on will
turn into a selection. The advanced user will also use it to "control" ink
opacity when she works with e.g duotones.
<P>
<A href="index.html">Index</A>
</TD>
</TR>
</TABLE>
</BODY></HTML>
<HTML
><HEAD
><TITLE
>The New Channel Dialog</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.49"><LINK
REL="HOME"
TITLE="GIMP User Manual"
HREF="../../contents.html"><LINK
REL="UP"
TITLE="Channels"
HREF="../../channels/index.html"><LINK
REL="PREVIOUS"
TITLE="The Channels Dialog"
HREF="../../dialogs/channels/channels.html"><LINK
REL="NEXT"
TITLE="Raise Channel"
HREF="../../channels/raise_channel.html"></HEAD
><BODY
CLASS="SECT1"
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
TEXT="#000000"
><DIV
CLASS="NAVHEADER"
><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TH
COLSPAN="3"
ALIGN="center"
>GIMP User Manual</TH
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../../dialogs/channels/channels.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="80%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="bottom"
>Chapter 6. Channels</TD
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../../channels/raise_channel.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="DIALOGS-CHANNELS-NEW-CHANNEL"
>The <SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>New Channel</SPAN
> Dialog</A
></H1
><A
NAME="AEN1493"
></A
><P
> Allows you to alter the name, color and fill opacity of the
new channel.
</P
><P
> The <SPAN
CLASS="GUIBUTTON"
>fill opacity</SPAN
> is useful for setting
how visible the underlying image is when you work with a channel
that will later be converted to a selection. The advanced user
will also use it to <SPAN
CLASS="QUOTE"
>"control"</SPAN
> ink opacity when he
works with things like duotones. Also you have the opportunity
to set a color which the channel will use when it's active.
<DIV
CLASS="NOTE"
><P
></P
><TABLE
CLASS="NOTE"
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="25"
ALIGN="CENTER"
VALIGN="TOP"
><IMG
SRC="../../../images/note.gif"
HSPACE="5"
ALT="Note"></TD
><TD
ALIGN="LEFT"
VALIGN="TOP"
><P
> The color field is a multifunction widget - doubleclicking
with your <SPAN
CLASS="MOUSEBUTTON"
>left</SPAN
> mousebutton will
show the color selector and you can drag and drop colors
from any color field in GIMP on it.
</P
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
></DIV
>
</P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../../dialogs/channels/channels.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../../contents.html"
>Home</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../../channels/raise_channel.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
>The <SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Channels</SPAN
> Dialog</TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../../channels/index.html"
>Up</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
>Raise Channel</TD
></TR
></TABLE
></DIV
></BODY
></HTML
>

7
help/C/dialogs/color_selectors/Makefile.am
View File

@ -3,10 +3,9 @@
helpdatadir = $(gimpdatadir)/help/C/dialogs/color_selectors
helpdata_DATA = \
built_in.html \
gtk.html \
index.html \
triangle.html \
built_in.html \
gtk.html \
triangle.html \
watercolor.html
EXTRA_DIST = $(helpdata_DATA)

275
help/C/dialogs/color_selectors/built_in.html
View File

@ -1,49 +1,226 @@
<!doctype html public "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.0 Transitional//EN"
"http://www.w3.org/TR/REC-html40/loose.dtd">
<HTML>
<HEAD>
<META HTTP-EQUIV="Content-Type" CONTENT="text/html; charset=iso-8859-1">
<TITLE>The Standard Gimp Color Selector</TITLE>
</HEAD>
<BODY text="#000000" bgcolor="#FFFFFF" link="#0000FF" vlink="#FF0000"
alink="#000088">
<H1>
The Standard Gimp Color Selector
</H1>
<P>
You can change the color manually by clicking on a hue in the spectrum color
field to the right, and then dragging the cross in the large color box on
the left to the exact color you want. If you want a specific RGB
(Red, Green, Blue) or HSV (Hue, Saturation,
Value) color, type the exact value in
the HSV or RGB parameter fields or drag the sliders to specify a
color.
</P>
<P>
The H (hue) channel is displayed in the color fields by default when you
open the Color Selection dialog. However, you can choose to search in another
channel for the color you want. It can be very useful to change the channel
to S (saturation) or V (value) when you're searching for a specific color. The
color spectrum will be displayed in a quite different way by doing this and
you might find it more useful.
</P>
<P>
In the bottom of the dialog you will find the current color specified as
a hexedecimal triplet. The function is targeted at Web developers - to
get the color
code into your HTML document simply select it and paste it in with your middle
mouse button. In Windows you must use Ctrl-C and Ctrl-V to achieve the same
result.
</P>
<P>
<A href="index.html">Index</A>
</P>
</BODY>
</HTML>
<HTML
><HEAD
><TITLE
>The Standard GIMP Color Selector</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.49"><LINK
REL="HOME"
TITLE="GIMP User Manual"
HREF="../../contents.html"><LINK
REL="UP"
TITLE="Dialogs"
HREF="../../dialogs/index.html"><LINK
REL="PREVIOUS"
TITLE="Undo History"
HREF="../../dialogs/undo_history.html"><LINK
REL="NEXT"
TITLE="The GTK Color Selector"
HREF="../../dialogs/color_selectors/gtk.html"></HEAD
><BODY
CLASS="SECT1"
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
TEXT="#000000"
><DIV
CLASS="NAVHEADER"
><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TH
COLSPAN="3"
ALIGN="center"
>GIMP User Manual</TH
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../../dialogs/undo_history.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="80%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="bottom"
>Chapter 12. Dialogs</TD
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../../dialogs/color_selectors/gtk.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="DIALOGS-COLOR-SELECTORS-BUILT-IN"
>The <SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Standard GIMP Color Selector</SPAN
></A
></H1
><A
NAME="AEN2802"
></A
><P
> You can change the color manually by clicking on a hue in the
<SPAN
CLASS="GUIBUTTON"
>spectrum color field</SPAN
> to the right, and then
dragging the <SPAN
CLASS="GUIBUTTON"
>cross</SPAN
> in the large color box
on the left to the exact color you want. If you want a specific
<SPAN
CLASS="ACRONYM"
>RGB</SPAN
> (Red, Green, Blue) or
<SPAN
CLASS="ACRONYM"
>HSV</SPAN
> (Hue, Saturation, Value) color, type the
exact value in the <SPAN
CLASS="ACRONYM"
>HSV</SPAN
> or
<SPAN
CLASS="ACRONYM"
>RGB</SPAN
> parameter fields or drag the sliders to
specify a color.
</P
><P
> The <SPAN
CLASS="ABBREV"
>H</SPAN
> (hue) channel is displayed in the color
fields by default when you open the <SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Color
Selection</SPAN
> dialog. However, you can choose to search
in another channel for the color you want. It can be very useful
to change the channel to <SPAN
CLASS="ABBREV"
>S</SPAN
> (saturation) or
<SPAN
CLASS="ABBREV"
>V</SPAN
> (value) when you're searching for a specific
color. The color spectrum will be displayed in a quite different
way by doing this and you might find it more useful.
</P
><P
> In the bottom of the dialog you will find the current color
specified as a hexedecimal triplet. The function is targeted at
Web developers &mdash; to get the color code into your
<SPAN
CLASS="ACRONYM"
>HTML</SPAN
> document simply select it and paste it in
with your <SPAN
CLASS="MOUSEBUTTON"
>middle</SPAN
> mouse button. If you are
using <SPAN
CLASS="APPLICATION"
>GIMP for Windows</SPAN
> you must use <B
CLASS="KEYCAP"
>Ctrl</B
>+<B
CLASS="KEYCAP"
>C</B
>
and <B
CLASS="KEYCAP"
>Ctrl</B
>+<B
CLASS="KEYCAP"
>V</B
>
to achieve the same result.
</P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../../dialogs/undo_history.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../../contents.html"
>Home</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../../dialogs/color_selectors/gtk.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
><SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Undo History</SPAN
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../../dialogs/index.html"
>Up</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
>The <SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>GTK Color Selector</SPAN
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
></DIV
></BODY
></HTML
>

204
help/C/dialogs/color_selectors/gtk.html
View File

@ -1,34 +1,170 @@
<!doctype html public "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.0 Transitional//EN" "http://www.w3.org/TR/REC-html40/loose.dtd">
<HTML>
<HEAD>
<META http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=iso-8859-1">
<TITLE>The GTK Color Selector</TITLE>
</HEAD>
<BODY text="#000000" bgcolor="#FFFFFF" link="#0000FF" vlink="#FF0000" alink="#000088">
<H1>
The GTK Color Selector
</H1>
<P>
The GTK color selector is similar to <A href="built_in.html">Gimp's standard
color</A> selector. The main difference is that you can't select in which color
space you want to work. The left color bar is always working
in value mode and you can alter the hue and saturation by dragging your
mouse in the circle.
</P>
<P>
Another difference is that the RGB values are represented in percent instead
of values from 0 to 255. 100% (1.0) is 255 and 0% (0.0) is 0. The fact
is that you should see it as the amount of e.g. red that you want to mix into
your color.
</P>
<P>
<A href="index.html">Index</A>
</P>
</BODY>
</HTML>
<HTML
><HEAD
><TITLE
>The GTK Color Selector</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.49"><LINK
REL="HOME"
TITLE="GIMP User Manual"
HREF="../../contents.html"><LINK
REL="UP"
TITLE="Dialogs"
HREF="../../dialogs/index.html"><LINK
REL="PREVIOUS"
TITLE="The Standard GIMP Color Selector"
HREF="../../dialogs/color_selectors/built_in.html"><LINK
REL="NEXT"
TITLE="The Triangle Color Selector"
HREF="../../dialogs/color_selectors/triangle.html"></HEAD
><BODY
CLASS="SECT1"
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
TEXT="#000000"
><DIV
CLASS="NAVHEADER"
><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TH
COLSPAN="3"
ALIGN="center"
>GIMP User Manual</TH
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../../dialogs/color_selectors/built_in.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="80%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="bottom"
>Chapter 12. Dialogs</TD
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../../dialogs/color_selectors/triangle.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="DIALOGS-COLOR-SELECTORS-GTK"
>The <SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>GTK Color Selector</SPAN
></A
></H1
><A
NAME="AEN2829"
></A
><P
> The <SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>GTK color selector</SPAN
> is similar to
<A
HREF="../../dialogs/color_selectors/built_in.html"
> <SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Gimp's standard color</SPAN
></A
> selector.
The main difference is that you can't select in which color space
you want to work. The left color bar is always working in value
mode and you can alter the hue and saturation by dragging your
mouse in the circle.
</P
><P
> Another difference is that the <SPAN
CLASS="ACRONYM"
>RGB</SPAN
> values are
represented in percent instead of values from 0 to 255. 100% (1.0)
is 255 and 0% (0.0) is 0. The fact is that you should see it as
the amount of e.g. red that you want to mix into your color.
</P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../../dialogs/color_selectors/built_in.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../../contents.html"
>Home</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../../dialogs/color_selectors/triangle.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
>The <SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Standard GIMP Color Selector</SPAN
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../../dialogs/index.html"
>Up</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
>The <SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Triangle Color Selector</SPAN
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
></DIV
></BODY
></HTML
>

23
help/C/dialogs/color_selectors/index.html
View File

@ -1,23 +0,0 @@
<!doctype html public "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.0 Transitional//EN" "http://www.w3.org/TR/REC-html40/loose.dtd">
<HTML>
<!-- This file is auto-generated by makeindex.sh. Please do not edit by hand. -->
<HEAD>
<META http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=iso-8859-1">
<TITLE>Index for color selectors</TITLE>
</HEAD>
<BODY text="#000000" bgcolor="#FFFFFF" link="#0000FF" vlink="#FF0000" alink="#000088">
<H1>color selectors Index</H1>
<P><A href="../index.html">Top index</A></P>
<P>Topics in this directory:</P>
<A href="built_in.html">built&nbsp;in</A><br>
<A href="gtk.html">gtk</A><br>
<A href="triangle.html">triangle</A><br>
<A href="watercolor.html">watercolor</A><br>
</BODY>
</HTML>

197
help/C/dialogs/color_selectors/triangle.html
View File

@ -1,28 +1,169 @@
<!doctype html public "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.0 Transitional//EN"
"http://www.w3.org/TR/REC-html40/loose.dtd">
<HTML>
<HEAD>
<META HTTP-EQUIV="Content-Type" CONTENT="text/html; charset=iso-8859-1">
<TITLE>The Triangle Color Selector</TITLE>
</HEAD>
<BODY text="#000000" bgcolor="#FFFFFF" link="#0000FF" vlink="#FF0000" alink="#000088">
<H1>
The Triangle Color Selector
</H1>
<P>
The triangle color selector is one of the best color selectors in GIMP.
This is due to the fact that it allows you to visualize hue, value and
saturation simultaneously. You control the hue by dragging the
triangle around in the outer circle. When you have
selected your base color, you simply alter the value and saturation by
pressing and dragging inside the triangle color scale.
<P>
<A href="index.html">Index</A>
</P>
</BODY>
</HTML>
<HTML
><HEAD
><TITLE
>The Triangle Color Selector</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.49"><LINK
REL="HOME"
TITLE="GIMP User Manual"
HREF="../../contents.html"><LINK
REL="UP"
TITLE="Dialogs"
HREF="../../dialogs/index.html"><LINK
REL="PREVIOUS"
TITLE="The GTK Color Selector"
HREF="../../dialogs/color_selectors/gtk.html"><LINK
REL="NEXT"
TITLE="The Watercolor Color Selector"
HREF="../../dialogs/color_selectors/watercolor.html"></HEAD
><BODY
CLASS="SECT1"
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
TEXT="#000000"
><DIV
CLASS="NAVHEADER"
><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TH
COLSPAN="3"
ALIGN="center"
>GIMP User Manual</TH
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../../dialogs/color_selectors/gtk.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="80%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="bottom"
>Chapter 12. Dialogs</TD
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../../dialogs/color_selectors/watercolor.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="DIALOGS-COLOR-SELECTORS-TRIANGLE"
>The <SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Triangle Color Selector</SPAN
></A
></H1
><A
NAME="AEN2840"
></A
><P
> The <SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>triangle color selector</SPAN
> is one of the
best color selectors in <SPAN
CLASS="APPLICATION"
>GIMP</SPAN
>. This is
due to the fact that it allows you to visualize hue, value and
saturation simultaneously. You control the hue by dragging the
<SPAN
CLASS="GUIBUTTON"
>triangle</SPAN
> around in the <SPAN
CLASS="GUIBUTTON"
>outer
circle</SPAN
>. When you have selected your base color, you
simply alter the value and saturation by pressing and dragging
inside the <SPAN
CLASS="GUIBUTTON"
>triangle color scale</SPAN
>.
</P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../../dialogs/color_selectors/gtk.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../../contents.html"
>Home</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../../dialogs/color_selectors/watercolor.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
>The <SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>GTK Color Selector</SPAN
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../../dialogs/index.html"
>Up</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
>The <SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Watercolor Color</SPAN
> Selector</TD
></TR
></TABLE
></DIV
></BODY
></HTML
>

214
help/C/dialogs/color_selectors/watercolor.html
View File

@ -1,41 +1,173 @@
<!doctype html public "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.0 Transitional//EN" "http://www.w3.org/TR/REC-html40/loose.dtd">
<HTML>
<HEAD>
<META HTTP-EQUIV="Content-Type" CONTENT="text/html; charset=iso-8859-1">
<TITLE>The Watercolor Color Selector</TITLE>
</HEAD>
<BODY text="#000000" bgcolor="#FFFFFF" link="#0000FF" vlink="#FF0000" alink="#000088">
<H1>
The Watercolor Color Selector
</H1>
<P>
This color selector resembles the little water cup you use for
blending colors when you're making a watercolor painting.
</P>
<P>
If you want to mix a color, simply move the mouse over the color scale
while pressing the left mouse button. If the color gets too dark you
just press the right mouse button to fade the color. You can also set
the pressure with which you collect the colors. Setting a low pressure
means you have to drag more to get a dark, highly saturated color, but
gives better control over the mixing.
</P>
<P>
You can save ten colors in the dialog. If you want to save a color
that you have mixed, just press new and the color will appear in the
color array. Remember that you can only save ten colors. If you
already have ten colors and save a new color, the oldest one will be
replaced.
</P>
<P>
<A href="index.html">Index</A>
</P>
</BODY>
</HTML>
<HTML
><HEAD
><TITLE
>The Watercolor Color Selector</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.49"><LINK
REL="HOME"
TITLE="GIMP User Manual"
HREF="../../contents.html"><LINK
REL="UP"
TITLE="Dialogs"
HREF="../../dialogs/index.html"><LINK
REL="PREVIOUS"
TITLE="The Triangle Color Selector"
HREF="../../dialogs/color_selectors/triangle.html"><LINK
REL="NEXT"
TITLE=" Edit Qmask Attributes "
HREF="../../dialogs/edit_qmask_attributes.html"></HEAD
><BODY
CLASS="SECT1"
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
TEXT="#000000"
><DIV
CLASS="NAVHEADER"
><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TH
COLSPAN="3"
ALIGN="center"
>GIMP User Manual</TH
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../../dialogs/color_selectors/triangle.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="80%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="bottom"
>Chapter 12. Dialogs</TD
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../../dialogs/edit_qmask_attributes.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="DIALOGS-COLOR-SELECTORS-WATERCOLOR"
>The <SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Watercolor Color</SPAN
> Selector</A
></H1
><A
NAME="AEN2851"
></A
><P
> This color selector resembles the little water cup you use for
blending colors when you're making a watercolor painting.
</P
><P
> If you want to mix a color, simply move the mouse over the color
scale while pressing the <SPAN
CLASS="GUIBUTTON"
>left</SPAN
> mouse button.
If the color gets too dark you just press the
<SPAN
CLASS="GUIBUTTON"
>right</SPAN
> mouse button to fade the color. You
can also set the pressure with which you collect the colors.
Setting a low pressure means you have to drag more to get a dark,
highly saturated color, but gives better control over the mixing.
</P
><P
> You can save ten colors in the dialog. If you want to save a color
that you have mixed, just press <SPAN
CLASS="GUIBUTTON"
>new</SPAN
> and the
color will appear in the color array. Remember that you can only
save ten colors. If you already have ten colors and save a new
color, the oldest one will be replaced.
</P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../../dialogs/color_selectors/triangle.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../../contents.html"
>Home</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../../dialogs/edit_qmask_attributes.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
>The <SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Triangle Color Selector</SPAN
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../../dialogs/index.html"
>Up</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
><SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Edit Qmask Attributes</SPAN
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
></DIV
></BODY
></HTML
>

554
help/C/dialogs/convert_to_indexed.html
View File

@ -1,116 +1,438 @@
<!doctype html public "-//w3c//dtd html 4.0 transitional//en">
<HTML>
<HEAD>
<META HTTP-EQUIV="Content-Type" CONTENT="text/html; charset=iso-8859-1">
<TITLE>Indexed Mode</TITLE>
</HEAD>
<BODY text="#000000" bgcolor="#FFFFFF" link="#0000FF" vlink="#FF0000" alink="#000088">
<TABLE width="100%" cellspacing="1" cellpadding="1">
<TR bgcolor="black">
<TD width="100%" align="center"><FONT size="+2" color="white">Indexed
Mode</FONT></TD>
</TR>
<TR bgcolor="white" >
<TD width="100%" align="left"><P>
<P>
This mode enables you to convert your RGB or Grayscale Image to an Indexed
image. An Indexed image is a image which only can have the colors specified
in it's color palette present in the image file. The maximum number of colors
in a Index image is 256. If you want to make e.g transparent GIF images then
you can only have a maximum of 255 colors since the last color (i.e color
number 256) will be used to determine if the pixel is opaque or transparent.
<H4>
Palette Options
</H4>
<DL>
<DD>
<DT>
<EM>Generate optimal palette:</EM>
<DD>
This is most of the time the best options to create a indexed image with.
Gimp will evaluate your colors and create a color palette suitable for the
image. You can specify the amount of colors that you want to have in your
index image but remember that you can't have more than 255 colors if are
about to create a index image with transparency.
<DT>
<EM>Use custom palette:</EM>
<DD>
If you want to use a predefined palette you have to use this option. You
have to choose your palette from the drop down menu, by default it's Web
palette. The Web palette is the palette used by e.g Netscape. This will help
you create web safe index images images (There is some debate if you should
index against the Web palette or not).
<DL>
<DT>
<EM>Custom Palette Options:</EM>
<DD>
Remove unused colors from final palette: If the palette contains colors that
aren't used in the Index image you can remove those colors and make the image
file size smaller. This is a good option so keep it enabled.
</DL>
<DT>
<EM>Use black/white (1-bit) palette:</EM>
<DD>
This option will create a "monochrome" image only built up of either black
or white pixels.
</DL>
<H4>
Dithering
</H4>
<P>
An Index image can only be built up of a maximum of 256 colors. Most of the
time this is quite limited and you will not be able to have all the colors
in your image represented in this limited color space. The image will look
like it is built up of "bands" or "color areas". To make Index images look
better you can dither them. This means that you will mix two or several colors
to mimic the missing color. The disadvantage is that the image can look like
it's built up of "dots".
<P>
<DL>
<DT>
<EM>No color dithering:</EM>
<DD>
Will disable dithering totally.
<DT>
<EM>Positioned color dithering:</EM>
<DD>
This is a option to use when you are dealing with animations (e.g gif
animations). The problem with dithering with e.g Floyd Steinberg dithering
in animations is that the dithering will not be constant. If you instead
use positioned dithering the dithering in constant areas will remain constant
across your frames. It is not as good as Floyd Steinberg dithering but is
better than no dithering at all.
<DT>
<EM>Floyd Steinberg dithering color dithering (reduced color
bleeding):</EM>
<DD>
When you use normal Floyd Steinberg dithering you will experience that the
colors will bleed to much . This is very visible when you index gradients,
the effect is that the gradient will look unnatural. If you encounter this
effect it's advisable to use this option (i.e Floyd Steinberg dithering reduced
colour bleeding).
<DT>
<EM>Floyd Steinberg dithering (normal):</EM>
<DD>
This is the best option to use when you are indexing images. It's only in
special cases that you will use the other dithering methods available.
<DT>
<DD>
<DT>
<EM>Enable dithering of transparency:</EM>
<DD>
Indexed images only have one transparency mode either it is off (the pixel
is totally solid) or on (the pixel is totally transparent). This makes it
very difficult to index images with smooth transitions from opaque to
transparent. When you enable dithering of transparency Gimp will try to mimic
the smooth transition by dithering pixels on and off. Note: A good alternative
to transparency dithering is the
<CODE><A HREF="../filters/semiflatten.html">Right-Click|Filters|Colors|Semi-Flatten</A></CODE>
function.
</DL>
<P>
<A href="index.html">Index</A>
</TD>
</TR>
</TABLE>
</BODY></HTML>
<HTML
><HEAD
><TITLE
> Indexed Mode </TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.49"><LINK
REL="HOME"
TITLE="GIMP User Manual"
HREF="../contents.html"><LINK
REL="UP"
TITLE="Image"
HREF="../image/index.html"><LINK
REL="PREVIOUS"
TITLE="Grayscale"
HREF="../image/image/mode/convert_to_grayscale.html"><LINK
REL="NEXT"
TITLE="Desaturate"
HREF="../image/image/colors/desaturate.html"></HEAD
><BODY
CLASS="SECT1"
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
TEXT="#000000"
><DIV
CLASS="NAVHEADER"
><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TH
COLSPAN="3"
ALIGN="center"
>GIMP User Manual</TH
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../image/image/mode/convert_to_grayscale.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="80%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="bottom"
>Chapter 4. Image</TD
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../image/image/colors/desaturate.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="DIALOGS-CONVERT-TO-INDEXED"
><SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Indexed Mode</SPAN
></A
></H1
><A
NAME="AEN1055"
></A
><P
> This mode enables you to convert <SPAN
CLASS="ACRONYM"
>RGB</SPAN
> or grayscale images
to indexed images. An indexed image is an image which only has the colors
specified in its color palette. The color palette is saved in the image
file. The maximum number of colors in an indexed image is 256. If you want
to make transparent <SPAN
CLASS="ACRONYM"
>GIF</SPAN
> images, then you can only use a
maximum of 255 colors since the last color will be used to determine if the
pixel is opaque or transparent.
</P
><DIV
CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="PALETTEOPTIONS"
>Palette Options</A
></H2
><P
></P
><DL
><DT
><SPAN
CLASS="GUILABEL"
>Generate optimal palette</SPAN
></DT
><DD
><P
> For the most part, this option is the best to use when
creating an indexed image.
<SPAN
CLASS="APPLICATION"
>GIMP</SPAN
> will evaluate your colors and
create a color palette suitable for the image. You can
specify the number of colors that you want to have in your
indexed image, but remember that you can't have more than 255
colors if are about to create an indexed image with
transparency.
</P
></DD
><DT
><SPAN
CLASS="GUILABEL"
>Use custom palette</SPAN
></DT
><DD
><P
> If you want to use a predefined palette, you have to use
this option. You then choose your palette from the drop
down menu. By default it's <SPAN
CLASS="GUILABEL"
>Web
palette</SPAN
>. The <SPAN
CLASS="GUILABEL"
>Web palette</SPAN
>
is the palette used by web browsers such as
<SPAN
CLASS="APPLICATION"
>Netscape</SPAN
>. This will help you
create web-safe indexed images.
<DIV
CLASS="NOTE"
><P
></P
><TABLE
CLASS="NOTE"
WIDTH="90%"
BORDER="0"
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="25"
ALIGN="CENTER"
VALIGN="TOP"
><IMG
SRC="../../images/note.gif"
HSPACE="5"
ALT="Note"></TD
><TD
ALIGN="LEFT"
VALIGN="TOP"
><P
> There is some debate over indexing against the
Web palette.
</P
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
></DIV
>
</P
></DD
><DT
><SPAN
CLASS="GUILABEL"
>Custom Palette Options</SPAN
></DT
><DD
><P
> <SPAN
CLASS="GUIBUTTON"
> Remove unused colors from final palette
</SPAN
>: If the palette contains colors that aren't
used in the indexed image, you can remove the extra colors
and make the image file size smaller. This is a good
option so keep it enabled.
</P
></DD
><DT
><SPAN
CLASS="GUILABEL"
>Use black/white (1-bit) palette
</SPAN
></DT
><DD
><P
> This option will create a monochrome image only built up
of black and white pixels.
</P
></DD
></DL
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="DITHERING"
>Dithering</A
></H2
><P
> An indexed image can only be built up of a maximum of 256
colors. Most of the time this is quite limiting and you will not
be able to have all the colors in your image represented in this
limited color space. The image might look like it is built up of
<SPAN
CLASS="QUOTE"
>"bands"</SPAN
> or <SPAN
CLASS="QUOTE"
>"color areas"</SPAN
>. To make
indexed images look better, you can dither them. This means that
two or more colors are mixed to mimic the missing color. The
disadvantage is that the image can look like it's built up of
<SPAN
CLASS="QUOTE"
>"dots"</SPAN
>.
</P
><P
> <P
></P
><DL
><DT
><SPAN
CLASS="GUILABEL"
> No color dithering </SPAN
></DT
><DD
><P
> Will disable dithering totally.
</P
></DD
><DT
><SPAN
CLASS="GUILABEL"
> Positioned color dithering </SPAN
></DT
><DD
><P
> Use this option when you are dealing with animations
such as <SPAN
CLASS="ACRONYM"
>GIF</SPAN
> animations. The problem
with dithering in animations is that the dithering will
not be constant. If you choose positioned dithering
instead, the dithering in constant areas will remain
constant across your frames. It is not as good as
<SPAN
CLASS="GUILABEL"
>Floyd Steinberg dithering</SPAN
>, but is
better than no dithering at all.
</P
></DD
><DT
><SPAN
CLASS="GUILABEL"
> Floyd Steinberg color dithering
(reduced color bleeding) </SPAN
></DT
><DD
><P
> With normal Floyd Steinberg dithering, you may
experience too much color bleeding. This is very visible
when you index gradients, causing an unnatural look. If
you encounter this effect, it is advisable to use this
option (i.e Floyd Steinberg dithering reduced colour
bleeding).
</P
></DD
><DT
><SPAN
CLASS="GUILABEL"
> Floyd Steinberg dithering (normal)
</SPAN
></DT
><DD
><P
> This is the best option to use when you are indexing
images. It's only in special cases that you will use the
other dithering methods available.
</P
></DD
><DT
><SPAN
CLASS="GUILABEL"
> Enable dithering of transparency
</SPAN
></DT
><DD
><P
> Indexed images only have one transparency mode &mdash; either it
is off (the pixel is totally solid) or on (the pixel is
totally transparent). This makes it very difficult to
index images with smooth transitions from opaque to
transparent. When you enable dithering of transparency,
<SPAN
CLASS="APPLICATION"
>GIMP</SPAN
> will try to mimic the
smooth transition by dithering pixels on and off.
<DIV
CLASS="NOTE"
><P
></P
><TABLE
CLASS="NOTE"
WIDTH="90%"
BORDER="0"
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="25"
ALIGN="CENTER"
VALIGN="TOP"
><IMG
SRC="../../images/note.gif"
HSPACE="5"
ALT="Note"></TD
><TD
ALIGN="LEFT"
VALIGN="TOP"
><P
> Note: A good alternative to transparency dithering
is the <A
HREF="../filters/semiflatten.html"
> <SPAN
CLASS="MOUSEBUTTON"
>Right</SPAN
>click-&gt;
<SPAN
CLASS="GUIMENU"
>Filters</SPAN
> -&gt;
<SPAN
CLASS="GUISUBMENU"
>Colors</SPAN
> -&gt;
<SPAN
CLASS="GUIMENUITEM"
>Semi-Flatten</SPAN
></A
>
function.
</P
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
></DIV
>
</P
></DD
></DL
>
</P
></DIV
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../image/image/mode/convert_to_grayscale.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../contents.html"
>Home</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../image/image/colors/desaturate.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
>Grayscale</TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../image/index.html"
>Up</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
><SPAN
CLASS="GUIMENUITEM"
>Desaturate</SPAN
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
></DIV
></BODY
></HTML
>

194
help/C/dialogs/copy_named.html
View File

@ -1,26 +1,168 @@
<!doctype html public "-//w3c//dtd html 4.0 transitional//en">
<HTML>
<HEAD>
<META HTTP-EQUIV="Content-Type" CONTENT="text/html; charset=iso-8859-1">
<TITLE>Copy Named</TITLE>
</HEAD>
<BODY text="#000000" bgcolor="#FFFFFF" link="#0000FF" vlink="#FF0000" alink="#000088">
<TABLE width="100%" cellspacing="1" cellpadding="1">
<TR bgcolor="black">
<TD width="100%" align="center"><FONT size="+2" color="white">Copy Named</FONT></TD>
</TR>
<TR bgcolor="white" >
<TD width="100%" align="left"><P>
<P>
Lets you copy the current selection of the image to a named buffer. You can copy several
parts to different buffers by giving them different names. Later on you are
able to paste an elective buffer by invoking
<A HREF="paste_named.html"><CODE>Right-Click|Edit|Buffer|Paste
Named</CODE></A>. If you don't specify a selection, the whole of
the current layer will by copied.
<P>
<A href="index.html">Index</A>
</TD>
</TR>
</TABLE>
</BODY></HTML>
<HTML
><HEAD
><TITLE
> Copy Named </TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.49"><LINK
REL="HOME"
TITLE="GIMP User Manual"
HREF="../contents.html"><LINK
REL="UP"
TITLE="Image"
HREF="../image/index.html"><LINK
REL="PREVIOUS"
TITLE=" Cut Named "
HREF="../dialogs/cut_named.html"><LINK
REL="NEXT"
TITLE=" Paste Named "
HREF="../dialogs/paste_named.html"></HEAD
><BODY
CLASS="SECT1"
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
TEXT="#000000"
><DIV
CLASS="NAVHEADER"
><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TH
COLSPAN="3"
ALIGN="center"
>GIMP User Manual</TH
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../dialogs/cut_named.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="80%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="bottom"
>Chapter 4. Image</TD
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../dialogs/paste_named.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="DIALOGS-COPY-NAMED"
><SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Copy Named</SPAN
></A
></H1
><A
NAME="AEN757"
></A
><P
> Lets you copy the current selection of the image to a named
buffer. You can copy several parts to different buffers by giving
them different names. Later on you are able to paste a buffer by
invoking <A
HREF="../dialogs/paste_named.html"
> <SPAN
CLASS="MOUSEBUTTON"
>Right</SPAN
>click -&gt;
<SPAN
CLASS="GUIMENU"
>Edit</SPAN
> -&gt; <SPAN
CLASS="GUISUBMENU"
>Buffer</SPAN
>
-&gt; <SPAN
CLASS="GUIMENUITEM"
>Paste Named</SPAN
> </A
>. If you
don't specify a selection, the entire active layer will be copied.
</P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../dialogs/cut_named.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../contents.html"
>Home</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../dialogs/paste_named.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
><SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Cut Named</SPAN
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../image/index.html"
>Up</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
><SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Paste Named</SPAN
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
></DIV
></BODY
></HTML
>

194
help/C/dialogs/cut_named.html
View File

@ -1,26 +1,168 @@
<!doctype html public "-//w3c//dtd html 4.0 transitional//en">
<HTML>
<HEAD>
<META HTTP-EQUIV="Content-Type" CONTENT="text/html; charset=iso-8859-1">
<TITLE>Cut Named</TITLE>
</HEAD>
<BODY text="#000000" bgcolor="#FFFFFF" link="#0000FF" vlink="#FF0000" alink="#000088">
<TABLE width="100%" cellspacing="1" cellpadding="1">
<TR bgcolor="black">
<TD width="100%" align="center"><FONT size="+2" color="white">Cut Named</FONT></TD>
</TR>
<TR bgcolor="white" >
<TD width="100%" align="left"><P>
<P>
Lets you cut the current selection to a named buffer. You can cut several parts
to different buffers by giving them different names. Later on you are able
to paste an elective buffer by invoking
<A HREF="paste_named.html"><CODE>Right-Click|Edit|Buffer|Paste
Named</CODE></A>. If you don't specify a selection, the whole of
the current layer is cut.
<P>
<A href="index.html">Index</A>
</TD>
</TR>
</TABLE>
</BODY></HTML>
<HTML
><HEAD
><TITLE
> Cut Named </TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.49"><LINK
REL="HOME"
TITLE="GIMP User Manual"
HREF="../contents.html"><LINK
REL="UP"
TITLE="Image"
HREF="../image/index.html"><LINK
REL="PREVIOUS"
TITLE="Paste As New"
HREF="../image/edit/paste_as_new.html"><LINK
REL="NEXT"
TITLE=" Copy Named "
HREF="../dialogs/copy_named.html"></HEAD
><BODY
CLASS="SECT1"
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
TEXT="#000000"
><DIV
CLASS="NAVHEADER"
><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TH
COLSPAN="3"
ALIGN="center"
>GIMP User Manual</TH
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../image/edit/paste_as_new.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="80%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="bottom"
>Chapter 4. Image</TD
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../dialogs/copy_named.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="DIALOGS-CUT-NAMED"
><SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Cut Named</SPAN
></A
></H1
><A
NAME="AEN746"
></A
><P
> Lets you cut the current selection to a named buffer. You can cut
several parts to different buffers by giving them different names.
Later on you are able to paste a selected buffer by invoking
<A
HREF="../dialogs/paste_named.html"
><SPAN
CLASS="MOUSEBUTTON"
>Right</SPAN
>-click
<SPAN
CLASS="GUIMENU"
>Edit</SPAN
> -&gt; <SPAN
CLASS="GUISUBMENU"
>Buffer</SPAN
>
-&gt; <SPAN
CLASS="GUIMENUITEM"
>Paste Named</SPAN
> </A
>. If you
don't specify a selection, the entire active layer is cut.
</P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../image/edit/paste_as_new.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../contents.html"
>Home</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../dialogs/copy_named.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
><SPAN
CLASS="GUIMENUITEM"
>Paste As New</SPAN
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../image/index.html"
>Up</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
><SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Copy Named</SPAN
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
></DIV
></BODY
></HTML
>

210
help/C/dialogs/device_status.html
View File

@ -1,34 +1,176 @@
<!doctype html public "-//w3c//dtd html 4.0 transitional//en">
<HTML>
<HEAD>
<META HTTP-EQUIV="Content-Type" CONTENT="text/html; charset=iso-8859-1">
<TITLE>Device Status</TITLE>
</HEAD>
<BODY text="#000000" bgcolor="#FFFFFF" link="#0000FF" vlink="#FF0000" alink="#000088">
<TABLE width="100%" cellspacing="1" cellpadding="1">
<TR bgcolor="black">
<TD width="100%" align="center"><FONT size="+2" color="white">The Device
Status Dialog</FONT></TD>
</TR>
<TR bgcolor="white" >
<TD width="100%" align="left"><P>
<P>
The Device dialog will show you the status of your input devices. This is
(only) useful if you have a drawing tablet. If you do have then you will
be able to see and adjust what tool, color, brush, pattern and gradient you
have assigned to your different pens (i.e input devices).
<P>
To alter the context each device has you simply drag and drop brushes, tools
etc. with the middle mouse button from the respective dialog (e.g you drag
and drop tools from the tool box).
<P>
It can be very wise to set up a standard context for all your tools and save
it (and disable saving of device status on exit in the preference dialog).
By doing so you will always have the same settings of the tools each time
you start Gimp.
<P>
<A href="index.html">Index</A>
</TD>
</TR>
</TABLE>
</BODY></HTML>
<HTML
><HEAD
><TITLE
>The Device Status Dialog</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.49"><LINK
REL="HOME"
TITLE="GIMP User Manual"
HREF="../contents.html"><LINK
REL="UP"
TITLE="Dialogs"
HREF="../dialogs/index.html"><LINK
REL="PREVIOUS"
TITLE="Input Devices"
HREF="../dialogs/input_devices.html"><LINK
REL="NEXT"
TITLE="The Document Index Dialog"
HREF="../dialogs/document_index.html"></HEAD
><BODY
CLASS="SECT1"
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
TEXT="#000000"
><DIV
CLASS="NAVHEADER"
><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TH
COLSPAN="3"
ALIGN="center"
>GIMP User Manual</TH
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../dialogs/input_devices.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="80%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="bottom"
>Chapter 12. Dialogs</TD
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../dialogs/document_index.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="DIALOGS-DEVICE-STATUS"
>The <SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Device Status</SPAN
> Dialog</A
></H1
><A
NAME="AEN2733"
></A
><P
> The <SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Device</SPAN
> dialog will show you the status
of your input devices. This is only useful if you have a drawing
tablet. If you do have one, then you will be able to see and
adjust what tool, color, brush, pattern and gradient you have
assigned to your different pens (i.e input devices).
</P
><P
> To alter the context each device has, you simply drag and drop
brushes, tools etc. with the <SPAN
CLASS="MOUSEBUTTON"
>middle</SPAN
>
mouse button from the respective dialog (e.g you drag and drop
tools from the <SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>toolbox</SPAN
>).
</P
><P
> It can be very wise to set up a standard context for all your
tools and save it (and disable saving of device status on exit in
the <SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>preference</SPAN
> dialog). By doing so you
will always have the same settings of the tools each time you
start <SPAN
CLASS="APPLICATION"
>GIMP</SPAN
>.
</P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../dialogs/input_devices.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../contents.html"
>Home</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../dialogs/document_index.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
>Input Devices</TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../dialogs/index.html"
>Up</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
>The <SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Document Index</SPAN
> Dialog</TD
></TR
></TABLE
></DIV
></BODY
></HTML
>

6
help/C/dialogs/display_filters/Makefile.am
View File

@ -3,9 +3,9 @@
helpdatadir = $(gimpdatadir)/help/C/dialogs/display_filters
helpdata_DATA = \
display_filters.html \
gamma.html \
index.html
display_filters.html \
gamma.html \
highcontrast.html
EXTRA_DIST = $(helpdata_DATA)

184
help/C/dialogs/display_filters/display_filters.html
View File

@ -1,28 +1,156 @@
<!doctype html public "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.0 Transitional//EN" "http://www.w3.org/TR/REC-html40/loose.dtd">
<HTML>
<HEAD>
<META HTTP-EQUIV="Content-Type" CONTENT="text/html; charset=iso-8859-1">
<TITLE>The Display Filters Dialog</TITLE>
</HEAD>
<BODY text="#000000" bgcolor="#FFFFFF" link="#0000FF" vlink="#FF0000" alink="#000088">
<H1>
The Display Filters Dialog
</H1>
<P>
Enables you to control Gimp color correction modules. On the right
side you have a list of available filters which you can add and there
by activate. The active filters will show up in the left list where
you can adjust the order of the currently active filters. If you mark
the filter and invoke Configure you can set options
specific to that filter.
</P>
<P>
<A href="index.html">Index</A>
</P>
</BODY>
</HTML>
<HTML
><HEAD
><TITLE
>The Display Filters Dialog</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.49"><LINK
REL="HOME"
TITLE="GIMP User Manual"
HREF="../../contents.html"><LINK
REL="UP"
TITLE="Dialogs"
HREF="../../dialogs/index.html"><LINK
REL="PREVIOUS"
TITLE="The Error Console Dialog"
HREF="../../dialogs/error_console.html"><LINK
REL="NEXT"
TITLE="The Gamma Display Filter"
HREF="../../dialogs/display_filters/gamma.html"></HEAD
><BODY
CLASS="SECT1"
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
TEXT="#000000"
><DIV
CLASS="NAVHEADER"
><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TH
COLSPAN="3"
ALIGN="center"
>GIMP User Manual</TH
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../../dialogs/error_console.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="80%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="bottom"
>Chapter 12. Dialogs</TD
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../../dialogs/display_filters/gamma.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="DISPLAY-FILTERS.SGML"
>The <SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Display Filters</SPAN
> Dialog</A
></H1
><A
NAME="AEN2771"
></A
><P
> Enables you to control <SPAN
CLASS="APPLICATION"
>GIMP</SPAN
> color
correction modules. On the right side, is a list of available
filters which you can add and activate. The active
filters will show up in the left list where you can adjust the
order of the active filters. If you mark the filter and
invoke <SPAN
CLASS="GUIBUTTON"
>Configure</SPAN
> you can set options
specific to that filter.
</P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../../dialogs/error_console.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../../contents.html"
>Home</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../../dialogs/display_filters/gamma.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
>The <SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Error Console</SPAN
> Dialog</TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../../dialogs/index.html"
>Up</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
>The Gamma Display Filter</TD
></TR
></TABLE
></DIV
></BODY
></HTML
>

179
help/C/dialogs/display_filters/gamma.html
View File

@ -1,27 +1,152 @@
<!doctype html public "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.0 Transitional//EN" "http://www.w3.org/TR/REC-html40/loose.dtd">
<HTML>
<HEAD>
<META HTTP-EQUIV="Content-Type" CONTENT="text/html; charset=iso-8859-1">
<TITLE>The Gamma Display Filter</TITLE>
</HEAD>
<BODY text="#000000" bgcolor="#FFFFFF" link="#0000FF" vlink="#FF0000" alink="#000088">
<H1>
The Gamma Display Filter
</H1>
<P>
The gamma display filter allows you to configure the way GIMP displays
images so your monitor will display them in a method that, as much as
possible, is the same as how the images will appear when printed
out. The level of gamma can be configured in display
filters &mdash; the default value is 1.00.
</P>
<P>
<A href="index.html">Index</A>
</P>
</BODY>
</HTML>
<HTML
><HEAD
><TITLE
>The Gamma Display Filter</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.49"><LINK
REL="HOME"
TITLE="GIMP User Manual"
HREF="../../contents.html"><LINK
REL="UP"
TITLE="Dialogs"
HREF="../../dialogs/index.html"><LINK
REL="PREVIOUS"
TITLE="The Display Filters Dialog"
HREF="../../dialogs/display_filters/display_filters.html"><LINK
REL="NEXT"
TITLE="The High Contrast Display Filter"
HREF="../../dialogs/display_filters/highcontrast.html"></HEAD
><BODY
CLASS="SECT1"
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
TEXT="#000000"
><DIV
CLASS="NAVHEADER"
><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TH
COLSPAN="3"
ALIGN="center"
>GIMP User Manual</TH
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../../dialogs/display_filters/display_filters.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="80%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="bottom"
>Chapter 12. Dialogs</TD
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../../dialogs/display_filters/highcontrast.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="GAMMA"
>The Gamma Display Filter</A
></H1
><A
NAME="AEN2778"
></A
><P
> The gamma display filter allows you to configure the way
<SPAN
CLASS="APPLICATION"
>GIMP</SPAN
> displays images so your monitor
will display them in a method that, as much as possible, is the
same as how the images will appear when printed out. The level of
gamma can be configured in <SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>display filters</SPAN
>
&mdash; the default value is 1.00.
</P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../../dialogs/display_filters/display_filters.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../../contents.html"
>Home</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../../dialogs/display_filters/highcontrast.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
>The <SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Display Filters</SPAN
> Dialog</TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../../dialogs/index.html"
>Up</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
>The High Contrast Display Filter</TD
></TR
></TABLE
></DIV
></BODY
></HTML
>

139
help/C/dialogs/display_filters/highcontrast.html Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,139 @@
<HTML
><HEAD
><TITLE
>The High Contrast Display Filter</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.49"><LINK
REL="HOME"
TITLE="GIMP User Manual"
HREF="../../contents.html"><LINK
REL="UP"
TITLE="Dialogs"
HREF="../../dialogs/index.html"><LINK
REL="PREVIOUS"
TITLE="The Gamma Display Filter"
HREF="../../dialogs/display_filters/gamma.html"><LINK
REL="NEXT"
TITLE="Undo History"
HREF="../../dialogs/undo_history.html"></HEAD
><BODY
CLASS="SECT1"
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
TEXT="#000000"
><DIV
CLASS="NAVHEADER"
><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TH
COLSPAN="3"
ALIGN="center"
>GIMP User Manual</TH
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../../dialogs/display_filters/gamma.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="80%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="bottom"
>Chapter 12. Dialogs</TD
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../../dialogs/undo_history.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="HIGHCONTRAST"
>The High Contrast Display Filter</A
></H1
><P
> Sorry, but the help page for "The High Contrast Display Filter"
is not written yet.
</P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../../dialogs/display_filters/gamma.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../../contents.html"
>Home</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../../dialogs/undo_history.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
>The Gamma Display Filter</TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../../dialogs/index.html"
>Up</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
><SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Undo History</SPAN
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
></DIV
></BODY
></HTML
>

33
help/C/dialogs/display_filters/index.html
View File

@ -1,33 +0,0 @@
<!doctype html public "-//w3c//dtd html 4.0 transitional//en">
<html>
<head>
<META HTTP-EQUIV="Content-Type" CONTENT="text/html; charset=iso-8859-1">
<title>Index for display_filters</title>
</head>
<body text="#000000" bgcolor="#FFFFFF" link="#0000FF"
vlink="#FF0000" alink="#000088">
<table width="100%" cellspacing="1" cellpadding="1">
<tr bgcolor="black">
<td width="100%" align="center">
<font size="+2" color="white">display_filters Index</font>
</td>
</tr>
<tr bgcolor="white" >
<td width="100%" align="left">
<p>
(/dialogs/display_filters/index.html)<p>
<a href="../index.html">Top index</a><p>
<p>Topics in this directory:<p>
<a href="display_filters.html">display_filters</a><br>
<a href="gamma.html">gamma</a><br>
<p>
/Karin & Olof
<p>
</td>
</tr>
</table>
</body>
</html>

191
help/C/dialogs/document_index.html
View File

@ -1,27 +1,164 @@
<!doctype html public "-//w3c//dtd html 4.0 transitional//en">
<HTML>
<HEAD>
<META HTTP-EQUIV="Content-Type" CONTENT="text/html; charset=iso-8859-1">
<TITLE>The Document Index Dialog</TITLE>
</HEAD>
<BODY text="#000000" bgcolor="#FFFFFF" link="#0000FF" vlink="#FF0000" alink="#000088">
<TABLE width="100%" cellspacing="1" cellpadding="1">
<TR bgcolor="black">
<TD width="100%" align="center"><FONT size="+2" color="white">The Document
Index Dialog</FONT></TD>
</TR>
<TR bgcolor="white" >
<TD width="100%" align="left"><P>
<P>
The document index dialog will enable you to see all previously opened images
in Gimp.
<P>
You can open a image by double clicking on the entry for it or by marking
it and click open. You are also able to sort the index by either moving the
position of a entry or removing it.
<P>
<A href="index.html">Index</A>
</TD>
</TR>
</TABLE>
</BODY></HTML>
<HTML
><HEAD
><TITLE
>The Document Index Dialog</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.49"><LINK
REL="HOME"
TITLE="GIMP User Manual"
HREF="../contents.html"><LINK
REL="UP"
TITLE="Dialogs"
HREF="../dialogs/index.html"><LINK
REL="PREVIOUS"
TITLE="The Device Status Dialog"
HREF="../dialogs/device_status.html"><LINK
REL="NEXT"
TITLE="The Error Console Dialog"
HREF="../dialogs/error_console.html"></HEAD
><BODY
CLASS="SECT1"
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
TEXT="#000000"
><DIV
CLASS="NAVHEADER"
><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TH
COLSPAN="3"
ALIGN="center"
>GIMP User Manual</TH
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../dialogs/device_status.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="80%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="bottom"
>Chapter 12. Dialogs</TD
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../dialogs/error_console.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="DOCUMENT-INDEX"
>The <SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Document Index</SPAN
> Dialog</A
></H1
><A
NAME="AEN2746"
></A
><P
> The <SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>document</SPAN
> index dialog will enable you
to see all previously opened images in <SPAN
CLASS="APPLICATION"
> GIMP
</SPAN
>.
</P
><P
> You can open an image by double clicking on the entry for it or by
marking it and clicking <SPAN
CLASS="GUIBUTTON"
>open</SPAN
>. You are also
able to sort the index by moving the position of entries or
removing them.
</P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../dialogs/device_status.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../contents.html"
>Home</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../dialogs/error_console.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
>The <SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Device Status</SPAN
> Dialog</TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../dialogs/index.html"
>Up</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
>The <SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Error Console</SPAN
> Dialog</TD
></TR
></TABLE
></DIV
></BODY
></HTML
>

183
help/C/dialogs/edit_qmask_attributes.html
View File

@ -1,28 +1,155 @@
<!doctype html public "-//w3c//dtd html 4.0 transitional//en">
<HTML>
<HEAD>
<META HTTP-EQUIV="Content-Type" CONTENT="text/html; charset=iso-8859-1">
<TITLE>Edit Qmask Attributes</TITLE>
</HEAD>
<BODY text="#000000" bgcolor="#FFFFFF" link="#0000FF" vlink="#FF0000" alink="#000088">
<TABLE width="100%" cellspacing="1" cellpadding="1">
<TR bgcolor="black">
<TD width="100%" align="center"><FONT size="+2" color="white">The Edit Qmask
Attributes Dialog</FONT></TD>
</TR>
<TR bgcolor="white" >
<TD width="100%" align="left"><P>
<P>
Allows you to alter the name, color and fill opacity of the quick mask channel.
<P>
The fill opacity is mainly useful if you want to set how much of the underlying
image you want to see, when you work with quick mask that you later on will
turn into a selection. If you set it to high you will not be able to see the
image that you are working with. Changing the color is most of the time only
useful if the image you are working with is mostly red.
<P>
<A href="index.html">Index</A>
</TD>
</TR>
</TABLE>
</BODY></HTML>
<HTML
><HEAD
><TITLE
> Edit Qmask Attributes </TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.49"><LINK
REL="HOME"
TITLE="GIMP User Manual"
HREF="../contents.html"><LINK
REL="UP"
TITLE="Dialogs"
HREF="../dialogs/index.html"><LINK
REL="PREVIOUS"
TITLE="The Watercolor Color Selector"
HREF="../dialogs/color_selectors/watercolor.html"><LINK
REL="NEXT"
TITLE="Filters"
HREF="../filters/index.html"></HEAD
><BODY
CLASS="SECT1"
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
TEXT="#000000"
><DIV
CLASS="NAVHEADER"
><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TH
COLSPAN="3"
ALIGN="center"
>GIMP User Manual</TH
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../dialogs/color_selectors/watercolor.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="80%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="bottom"
>Chapter 12. Dialogs</TD
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../filters/index.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="EDIT-QMASK-ATTRIBUTES"
><SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Edit Qmask Attributes</SPAN
></A
></H1
><A
NAME="AEN2862"
></A
><P
> Allows you to alter the name, color, and fill opacity of the quick
mask channel.
</P
><P
> The <SPAN
CLASS="GUILABEL"
>fill opacity</SPAN
> is used to set how much of
the underlying image is visible when you work with the quick mask.
If you set it too high, you will not be able to see the image
underneath. Use a color that allows a good visibility of the
underlying image (i.e. not red if it is a red image).
</P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../dialogs/color_selectors/watercolor.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../contents.html"
>Home</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../filters/index.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
>The <SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Watercolor Color</SPAN
> Selector</TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../dialogs/index.html"
>Up</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
>Filters</TD
></TR
></TABLE
></DIV
></BODY
></HTML
>

216
help/C/dialogs/error_console.html
View File

@ -1,28 +1,188 @@
<!doctype html public "-//w3c//dtd html 4.0 transitional//en">
<HTML>
<HEAD>
<META HTTP-EQUIV="Content-Type" CONTENT="text/html; charset=iso-8859-1">
<TITLE>Help Page for error_console</TITLE>
</HEAD>
<BODY text="#000000" bgcolor="#FFFFFF" link="#0000FF" vlink="#FF0000" alink="#000088">
<TABLE width="100%" cellspacing="1" cellpadding="1">
<TR bgcolor="black">
<TD width="100%" align="center"><FONT size="+2" color="white">The Error Console
Dialog</FONT></TD>
</TR>
<TR bgcolor="white" >
<TD width="100%" align="left"><P>
<P>
The error console will show internal Gimp
error messages. An example of such error is when Gimp fails to save or load
a image.
<P>
If you encounter a bug in Gimp it can be wise to open the error console and
try to reproduce the bug. If Gimp then produces any error messages you can
post that along with a bug description to the Gimp developers.
<P>
<A href="index.html">Index</A>
</TD>
</TR>
</TABLE>
</BODY></HTML>
<HTML
><HEAD
><TITLE
>The Error Console Dialog</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.49"><LINK
REL="HOME"
TITLE="GIMP User Manual"
HREF="../contents.html"><LINK
REL="UP"
TITLE="Dialogs"
HREF="../dialogs/index.html"><LINK
REL="PREVIOUS"
TITLE="The Document Index Dialog"
HREF="../dialogs/document_index.html"><LINK
REL="NEXT"
TITLE="The Display Filters Dialog"
HREF="../dialogs/display_filters/display_filters.html"></HEAD
><BODY
CLASS="SECT1"
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
TEXT="#000000"
><DIV
CLASS="NAVHEADER"
><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TH
COLSPAN="3"
ALIGN="center"
>GIMP User Manual</TH
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../dialogs/document_index.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="80%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="bottom"
>Chapter 12. Dialogs</TD
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../dialogs/display_filters/display_filters.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="ERROR-CONSOLE"
>The <SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Error Console</SPAN
> Dialog</A
></H1
><A
NAME="AEN2756"
></A
><P
> The <SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>error console</SPAN
> will show internal
<SPAN
CLASS="APPLICATION"
>GIMP</SPAN
> error messages. An example of
such an error is when <SPAN
CLASS="APPLICATION"
>GIMP</SPAN
> fails to save
or load an image.
</P
><P
> If you encounter a bug in <SPAN
CLASS="APPLICATION"
>GIMP</SPAN
>, it can
be wise to open the error console and try to reproduce the bug. If
<SPAN
CLASS="APPLICATION"
>GIMP</SPAN
> then produces any error messages,
you can email <TT
CLASS="EMAIL"
>&#60;<A
HREF="mailto:bugs@gimp.org"
>bugs@gimp.org</A
>&#62;</TT
> the message along with
a bug description to the <SPAN
CLASS="APPLICATION"
>GIMP</SPAN
>
developers at <TT
CLASS="EMAIL"
>&#60;<A
HREF="mailto:gimp-developer@scam.xcf.berkeley.edu"
>gimp-developer@scam.xcf.berkeley.edu</A
>&#62;</TT
>.
</P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../dialogs/document_index.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../contents.html"
>Home</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../dialogs/display_filters/display_filters.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
>The <SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Document Index</SPAN
> Dialog</TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../dialogs/index.html"
>Up</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
>The <SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Display Filters</SPAN
> Dialog</TD
></TR
></TABLE
></DIV
></BODY
></HTML
>

214
help/C/dialogs/feather_selection.html
View File

@ -1,32 +1,182 @@
<!doctype html public "-//w3c//dtd html 4.0 transitional//en">
<HTML>
<HEAD>
<META HTTP-EQUIV="Content-Type" CONTENT="text/html; charset=iso-8859-1">
<TITLE>Feather Selection</TITLE>
</HEAD>
<BODY text="#000000" bgcolor="#FFFFFF" link="#0000FF" vlink="#FF0000" alink="#000088">
<TABLE width="100%" cellspacing="1" cellpadding="1">
<TR bgcolor="black">
<TD width="100%" align="center"><FONT size="+2" color="white">Feather
Selection</FONT></TD>
</TR>
<TR bgcolor="white" >
<TD width="100%" align="left"><P>
<P>
In the Feather dialog you select how much you want to feather the selection
by.
<P>
Feather produces a selection with fuzzy edges. In other words, a feathered
selection becomes more and more transparent until it reaches the edges of
the selection. Feather allows you to blend a color or image softly with the
background.
<H3>
Additional Information
</H3>
Default Keyboard Shortcut: Ctrl+Shift+F
<P>
<A href="index.html">Index</A>
</TD>
</TR>
</TABLE>
</BODY></HTML>
<HTML
><HEAD
><TITLE
> Feather Selection </TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.49"><LINK
REL="HOME"
TITLE="GIMP User Manual"
HREF="../contents.html"><LINK
REL="UP"
TITLE="Image"
HREF="../image/index.html"><LINK
REL="PREVIOUS"
TITLE="Float Selection"
HREF="../image/select/float.html"><LINK
REL="NEXT"
TITLE="Sharpen Selection"
HREF="../image/select/sharpen.html"></HEAD
><BODY
CLASS="SECT1"
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
TEXT="#000000"
><DIV
CLASS="NAVHEADER"
><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TH
COLSPAN="3"
ALIGN="center"
>GIMP User Manual</TH
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../image/select/float.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="80%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="bottom"
>Chapter 4. Image</TD
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../image/select/sharpen.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="FEATHER-SELECTION"
><SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Feather Selection</SPAN
></A
></H1
><A
NAME="AEN868"
></A
><P
> In the <SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Feather</SPAN
> dialog you select by how
much you want to feather the selection.
</P
><P
> <SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Feather</SPAN
> produces a selection with fuzzy
edges. In other words, when a selection is feathered, it becomes
more and more transparent until it reaches the edges of the
selection. Feather allows you to blend a color or image softly
into the background.
</P
><DIV
CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN874"
>Additional Information</A
></H2
><P
> Default Keyboard Shortcut: <B
CLASS="KEYCAP"
>Ctrl</B
>-<B
CLASS="KEYCAP"
>Shift</B
>-<B
CLASS="KEYCAP"
> F </B
>
</P
></DIV
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../image/select/float.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../contents.html"
>Home</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../image/select/sharpen.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
><SPAN
CLASS="GUIMENUITEM"
>Float Selection</SPAN
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../image/index.html"
>Up</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
><SPAN
CLASS="GUIMENUITEM"
>Sharpen Selection</SPAN
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
></DIV
></BODY
></HTML
>

323
help/C/dialogs/file_new.html
View File

@ -1,66 +1,257 @@
<!doctype html public "-//w3c//dtd html 4.0 transitional//en">
<HTML>
<HEAD>
<META HTTP-EQUIV="Content-Type" CONTENT="text/html; charset=iso-8859-1">
<TITLE>New Image</TITLE>
</HEAD>
<BODY text="#000000" bgcolor="#FFFFFF" link="#0000FF" vlink="#FF0000" alink="#000088">
<TABLE width="100%" cellspacing="1" cellpadding="1">
<TR bgcolor="black">
<TD width="100%" align="center"><FONT size="+2" color="white">New Image</FONT></TD>
</TR>
<TR bgcolor="white" >
<TD width="100%" align="left"><P>
<P>
File New will create a new Gimp image in either RGB (color) or Grayscale
mode. You can't create an Indexed image since you will not know which colors
your palette should have. Besides, working in Indexed mode is not a good choice
instead work in RGB and convert to Indexed just before saving the image.
<P>
How to create a new image:
<P>
<DL>
<DT>
<EM>Set the resolution:</EM>
<DD>
The resolution is how many pixels per length unit you what your image to
built up with. The default 72ppi (72 pixels/inch) is good if you want to
create web graphics (you can alter the default value in the preferences dialog).
However if you going to print your image you will probably need a lot more
than 72ppi.<BR>
You have several choices about how you want to measure the resolution pixels
per inch, mm, points or picas (there is also an option which will bring
up a dialog with even more choices). We suggest that you stick to ppi since
that the most common format when you are dealing with images.<BR>
You can have different X and Y resolutions by unchecking the chain but that
is not recommended.
<DT>
<EM>Set the size:</EM>
<DD>
You have two options either you can set it directly in pixels in the
top frame or in a real world unit in the middle frame. If you are working
with web graphics we suggest that you deal with pixels directly. If you going
to print your image then setting in a real world unit is the preferred.
<DT>
<EM>Set the mode/type of image:</EM>
<DD>
Set the mode to either RGB or Grayscale
<DT>
<EM>Set fill type:</EM>
<DD>
Foreground takes the currently active foreground color from the toolbox<BR>
Background take the currently active background color from the toolbox<BR>
White sets the fill color to white no matter what the toolbox
color is<BR>
Transparent prevents the image from filling instead you will get a
totally "empty" image to start with.
</DL>
<P>
The Reset button resets all values their default values. OK creates a new
image.
<P>
<A href="index.html">Index</A>
</TD>
</TR>
</TABLE>
</BODY></HTML>
<HTML
><HEAD
><TITLE
> New Image </TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.49"><LINK
REL="HOME"
TITLE="GIMP User Manual"
HREF="../contents.html"><LINK
REL="UP"
TITLE="File"
HREF="../file/index.html"><LINK
REL="PREVIOUS"
TITLE="File"
HREF="../file/index.html"><LINK
REL="NEXT"
TITLE=" Open File "
HREF="../dialogs/file_open.html"></HEAD
><BODY
CLASS="SECT1"
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
TEXT="#000000"
><DIV
CLASS="NAVHEADER"
><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TH
COLSPAN="3"
ALIGN="center"
>GIMP User Manual</TH
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../file/index.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="80%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="bottom"
>Chapter 9. File</TD
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../dialogs/file_open.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="DIALOGS-FILE-NEW"
><SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>New Image</SPAN
></A
></H1
><A
NAME="AEN1956"
></A
><P
> <SPAN
CLASS="GUIMENUITEM"
>File New</SPAN
> will create a new image in
either <SPAN
CLASS="ACRONYM"
>RGB</SPAN
> (color) or grayscale mode. You can't
create an indexed image since <SPAN
CLASS="APPLICATION"
>GIMP</SPAN
> will
not know which colors your palette should have. Working in indexed
mode is usually not a good choice. Instead work in
<SPAN
CLASS="ACRONYM"
>RGB</SPAN
> and convert to indexed just before saving
the image.
</P
><P
> How to create a new image:
<P
></P
><DL
><DT
>Set the resolution</DT
><DD
><P
> The resolution is how many pixels per unit you want for
your image. The default 72dpi (72 pixels/inch) is good if
you want to create web graphics (you can alter the default
value in the <SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>preferences</SPAN
> dialog).
However if you are going to print your image, you will
probably need a lot more than 72dpi. You have several
choices about how you want to measure the resolution
&mdash; pixels per inch, mm, points or picas (there is
also an option which will bring up a dialog with even more
choices). We suggest that you stick to ppi since that the
most common format when you are dealing with images. You
can have different X and Y resolutions by unlinking the
<SPAN
CLASS="GUIBUTTON"
>chain</SPAN
>, but that is not recommended.
</P
></DD
><DT
>Set the size</DT
><DD
><P
> You have two options. Either you can set it directly in
pixels in the top frame or in a real world unit in the
middle frame. If you are working with web graphics we
suggest that you deal with pixels directly. If you are
going to print your image, then setting in a real world
unit is the preferred.
</P
></DD
><DT
>Set the mode/type of image</DT
><DD
><P
> Set the mode to either <SPAN
CLASS="ACRONYM"
>RGB</SPAN
> or Grayscale
</P
></DD
><DT
>Set fill type</DT
><DD
><P
> <SPAN
CLASS="GUILABEL"
>Foreground</SPAN
> takes the current
foreground color from the <SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>toolbox</SPAN
>.
<SPAN
CLASS="GUILABEL"
>Background</SPAN
> takes the current
background color from the <SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>toolbox</SPAN
>.
White sets the fill color to white no matter what the
toolbox colors are. Transparent prevents the image from
filling. Instead you will get a totally
<SPAN
CLASS="QUOTE"
>"empty"</SPAN
> image to start.
</P
></DD
></DL
>
</P
><P
> The <SPAN
CLASS="GUIBUTTON"
>Reset</SPAN
> button resets all values to
their default values. <SPAN
CLASS="GUIBUTTON"
>OK</SPAN
> creates a new image.
</P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../file/index.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../contents.html"
>Home</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../dialogs/file_open.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
>File</TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../file/index.html"
>Up</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
><SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Open File</SPAN
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
></DIV
></BODY
></HTML
>

280
help/C/dialogs/file_open.html
View File

@ -1,46 +1,234 @@
<!doctype html public "-//w3c//dtd html 4.0 transitional//en">
<HTML>
<HEAD>
<META HTTP-EQUIV="Content-Type" CONTENT="text/html; charset=iso-8859-1">
<TITLE>Open File</TITLE>
</HEAD>
<BODY text="#000000" bgcolor="#FFFFFF" link="#0000FF" vlink="#FF0000" alink="#000088">
<TABLE width="100%" cellspacing="1" cellpadding="1">
<TR bgcolor="black">
<TD width="100%" align="center"><FONT size="+2" color="white">Open File</FONT></TD>
</TR>
<TR bgcolor="white" >
<TD width="100%" align="left"><P>
<P>
Open dialog is where you can load images into the Gimp for viewing
or editing. The left hand window shows the directories and the right
hand side shows the files in the selected directory. To open a file,
select it in the files listing, then choose what file type it is - if
the file has an extension which defines it's filetype (such as .xcf)
you can select "Automatic" and Gimp will open the file in that format.
Alternatively, you can force Gimp to open the file as a specific format
by choosing one of the other options in the drop down list.
<P>
Some images have a preview associated with then so you can see what
the image is before opening it. This is particularly useful for larger
images, where opening the full image will take a while. If an image
doesn't have a preview, you can click "Generate Preview" to create on.
This preview image is stored in the a sub-directory of the current one,
called .xvpics. This preview image will be used in future when using
the open dialog. Clicking OK opens the image with the selected
settings, Cancel aborts.
<P>
A useful feature of the Load Image dialog is autocompletion of
filenames. Type the first few letters of the filename and pressing the
Tab key will complete as much of the filename as is uniquely defined by
what has already been typed. The side of the dialog will display all
files that match the letters in the selection box. You can then type
more letters and press Tab again to update the window. You
can load multiple images by pressing Shift key and clicking on each
file you want to open.
<P>
<A href="index.html">Index</A>
</TD>
</TR>
</TABLE>
</BODY></HTML>
<HTML
><HEAD
><TITLE
> Open File </TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.49"><LINK
REL="HOME"
TITLE="GIMP User Manual"
HREF="../contents.html"><LINK
REL="UP"
TITLE="File"
HREF="../file/index.html"><LINK
REL="PREVIOUS"
TITLE=" New Image "
HREF="../dialogs/file_new.html"><LINK
REL="NEXT"
TITLE=" File Save or Save
As"
HREF="../dialogs/file_save.html"></HEAD
><BODY
CLASS="SECT1"
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
TEXT="#000000"
><DIV
CLASS="NAVHEADER"
><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TH
COLSPAN="3"
ALIGN="center"
>GIMP User Manual</TH
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../dialogs/file_new.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="80%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="bottom"
>Chapter 9. File</TD
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../dialogs/file_save.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="DIALOGS-FILE-OPEN"
><SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Open File</SPAN
></A
></H1
><A
NAME="AEN1995"
></A
><P
> <SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Open</SPAN
> dialog is where you can load images
into <SPAN
CLASS="APPLICATION"
>GIMP</SPAN
> for viewing or editing. The
left hand window shows the directories and the right hand window
shows the files in the selected directory. To open a file, select
it in the files listing then choose the correct file type. If the
file has an extension which defines its filetype (such as .xcf)
you can select <SPAN
CLASS="GUIBUTTON"
>Automatic</SPAN
> and
<SPAN
CLASS="APPLICATION"
>GIMP</SPAN
> will open the file in that format.
Alternatively, you can force <SPAN
CLASS="APPLICATION"
>GIMP</SPAN
> to
open the file as a specific format by choosing one of the other
options in the drop down list.
</P
><P
> Some images have a preview associated with them so you can see
what the image is before opening it. This is particularly useful
for larger images where opening the full image will take a while.
If an image doesn't have a preview, you can click
<SPAN
CLASS="GUIBUTTON"
>Generate Preview</SPAN
> to create one. This
preview image is stored in a sub-directory of the current one
called <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>.xvpics</TT
>. This
preview image will be used in the future when using the
<SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>open</SPAN
> dialog. Clicking
<SPAN
CLASS="GUIBUTTON"
>OK</SPAN
> opens the image with the selected
settings; <SPAN
CLASS="GUIBUTTON"
>Cancel</SPAN
> aborts.
</P
><P
> A useful feature of the <SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Load Image</SPAN
> dialog
is autocompletion of file names. Type the first few letters of the
file name and press the <B
CLASS="KEYCAP"
>Tab</B
> key.
<SPAN
CLASS="APPLICATION"
>GIMP</SPAN
> will then complete as much of the
file name as is uniquely defined by what has already been typed.
The right side of the dialog will display all files that match the
letters in the selection box. You can then type more letters and
press <B
CLASS="KEYCAP"
>Tab</B
> again to update the window.
</P
><P
> You can load multiple images by pressing <B
CLASS="KEYCAP"
>Shift</B
>
and clicking on each file you want to open.
</P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../dialogs/file_new.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../contents.html"
>Home</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../dialogs/file_save.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
><SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>New Image</SPAN
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../file/index.html"
>Up</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
><SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>File Save</SPAN
> or <SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Save
As</SPAN
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
></DIV
></BODY
></HTML
>

351
help/C/dialogs/file_save.html
View File

@ -1,45 +1,306 @@
<!doctype html public "-//w3c//dtd html 4.0 transitional//en">
<HTML>
<HEAD>
<META HTTP-EQUIV="Content-Type" CONTENT="text/html; charset=iso-8859-1">
<TITLE>File Save or Save As</TITLE>
</HEAD>
<BODY text="#000000" bgcolor="#FFFFFF" link="#0000FF" vlink="#FF0000" alink="#000088">
<TABLE width="100%" cellspacing="1" cellpadding="1">
<TR bgcolor="black">
<TD width="100%" align="center"><FONT size="+2" color="white">File Save or
Save As</FONT></TD>
</TR>
<TR bgcolor="white" >
<TD width="100%" align="left"><P>
<P>
File save lets you save your file either by it's extension e.g save a file.xcf
as a a XCF image. The XCF file format is Gimps native file format and is
the preferred format to save all your images in. You can of course
save as e.g TIFF or JPEG but all the specific Gimp image information will
be lost (i.e the information about layers, channels, parasites, etc).
<P>
When you save a image in a non Gimp format (i.e not as a XCF or XJT image)
will get the opportunity to export it. By exporting it you will be sure of
getting all the visual image information saved in the non native format.
If you Ignore export then only the currently active layer will be saved.
<P>
The save dialog works like any other file dialogs but you also have two ways
to fast navigation. Tab completion, e.g if you have a directory /gimp and
the save dialog is currently with in the /home/gimp directly. Then you only
have to type /gi and hit tab and the name will be completed (It works
just like tab completion in bash or tchs sells in UNIX or if you have turned
it on as tab completion in the cms in NT). You also have a drop down directory
menu which will enable you to quickly move up in the directory hirarcy.
<P>
To even extend the opportunity you can create directories, delete and rename
files in the save dialog. Creating directories is very handy since often
end up doing a new image for a new project before you made a directory to
contain images for the project. However you must sometimes step up and down
once in the directory hierarcy before Gimp will be able to see the new directory.
<P>
<A href="index.html">Index</A>
</TD>
</TR>
</TABLE>
</BODY></HTML>
<HTML
><HEAD
><TITLE
> File Save or Save
As</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.49"><LINK
REL="HOME"
TITLE="GIMP User Manual"
HREF="../contents.html"><LINK
REL="UP"
TITLE="File"
HREF="../file/index.html"><LINK
REL="PREVIOUS"
TITLE=" Open File "
HREF="../dialogs/file_open.html"><LINK
REL="NEXT"
TITLE="Revert Image"
HREF="../dialogs/revert_image.html"></HEAD
><BODY
CLASS="SECT1"
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
TEXT="#000000"
><DIV
CLASS="NAVHEADER"
><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TH
COLSPAN="3"
ALIGN="center"
>GIMP User Manual</TH
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../dialogs/file_open.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="80%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="bottom"
>Chapter 9. File</TD
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../dialogs/revert_image.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="DIALOGS-FILE-SAVE"
><SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>File Save</SPAN
> or <SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Save
As</SPAN
></A
></H1
><A
NAME="AEN2020"
></A
><P
> <SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>File Save</SPAN
> lets you save your file either by
its extension e.g. save a
<TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
><TT
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
><I
>file</I
></TT
>.xcf</TT
> as an
<SPAN
CLASS="ACRONYM"
>XCF</SPAN
> image. The <SPAN
CLASS="ACRONYM"
>XCF</SPAN
> file
format is <SPAN
CLASS="APPLICATION"
>GIMP</SPAN
>'s native file format
and is the preferred format to save all your images in.
<DIV
CLASS="NOTE"
><P
></P
><TABLE
CLASS="NOTE"
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="25"
ALIGN="CENTER"
VALIGN="TOP"
><IMG
SRC="../../images/note.gif"
HSPACE="5"
ALT="Note"></TD
><TD
ALIGN="LEFT"
VALIGN="TOP"
><P
> You can of course save as <SPAN
CLASS="ACRONYM"
>TIFF</SPAN
>,
<SPAN
CLASS="ACRONYM"
>JPEG</SPAN
>, or one of the other available
formats, but all the specific <SPAN
CLASS="APPLICATION"
>GIMP</SPAN
>
image information will be lost (i.e the information about
layers, channels, parasites, etc).
</P
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
></DIV
>
</P
><P
> When you save an image in a non-<SPAN
CLASS="APPLICATION"
>GIMP</SPAN
>
format (i.e not as a <SPAN
CLASS="ACRONYM"
>XCF</SPAN
> or
<SPAN
CLASS="ACRONYM"
>XJT</SPAN
> image) you could be asked to export it. By
exporting it, you will be sure of getting all the visual image
information saved in the non-native format. (Exporting will, for
example, flatten an image to be saved as
<TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>.jpg</TT
>) Ignoring the suggestion to export runs
the risk of losing valuable image information such as nonactive
layers.
</P
><P
> The <SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>save</SPAN
> dialog works like any other file
dialog, but you also have two means of fast navigation. Tab
completion, if you have a directory <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>/gimp</TT
> and the
<SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>save</SPAN
> dialog is currently with in the
<TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>/home/gimp</TT
> directly. Then
you only have to type <TT
CLASS="USERINPUT"
><B
>/gi</B
></TT
> and hit
<B
CLASS="KEYCAP"
>TAB</B
> and the name will be completed (It works just
like <B
CLASS="KEYCAP"
>TAB</B
> completion in
<SPAN
CLASS="APPLICATION"
>bash</SPAN
> or <SPAN
CLASS="APPLICATION"
>tsh</SPAN
>
shells in UNIX or if you have turned it on as <B
CLASS="KEYCAP"
>TAB</B
>
completion in the <SPAN
CLASS="APPLICATION"
>cms</SPAN
> in
<SPAN
CLASS="APPLICATION"
>NT</SPAN
>). You also have a drop down
directory menu which will enable you to quickly move up in the
directory hierarchy.
</P
><P
> You can also create directories and delete or rename files in the
<SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>save</SPAN
> dialog. Sometimes it is necessary to
step up and down once in the directory hierarchy before
<SPAN
CLASS="APPLICATION"
>GIMP</SPAN
> will be able to see the new
directory.
</P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../dialogs/file_open.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../contents.html"
>Home</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../dialogs/revert_image.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
><SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Open File</SPAN
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../file/index.html"
>Up</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
>Revert Image</TD
></TR
></TABLE
></DIV
></BODY
></HTML
>

15
help/C/dialogs/gradient_editor/Makefile.am
View File

@ -3,14 +3,13 @@
helpdatadir = $(gimpdatadir)/help/C/dialogs/gradient_editor
helpdata_DATA = \
copy_gradient.html \
delete_gradient.html \
gradient_editor.html \
index.html \
new_gradient.html \
rename_gradient.html \
replicate_segment.html \
save_as_pov_ray.html \
copy_gradient.html \
delete_gradient.html \
gradient_editor.html \
new_gradient.html \
rename_gradient.html \
replicate_segment.html \
save_as_povray.html \
split_segments_uniformly.html
EXTRA_DIST = $(helpdata_DATA)

178
help/C/dialogs/gradient_editor/copy_gradient.html
View File

@ -1,23 +1,155 @@
<!doctype html public "-//w3c//dtd html 4.0 transitional//en">
<HTML>
<HEAD>
<META HTTP-EQUIV="Content-Type" CONTENT="text/html; charset=iso-8859-1">
<TITLE>Copy Gradient</TITLE>
</HEAD>
<BODY text="#000000" bgcolor="#FFFFFF" link="#0000FF" vlink="#FF0000" alink="#000088">
<TABLE width="100%" cellspacing="1" cellpadding="1">
<TR bgcolor="black">
<TD width="100%" align="center"><FONT size="+2" color="white">Copy
Gradient</FONT></TD>
</TR>
<TR bgcolor="white" >
<TD width="100%" align="left"><P>
<P>
Lets you specify the name of the copy. The copy will be stored in your personal
Gimp gradient directory.
<P>
<A href="index.html">Index</A>
</TD>
</TR>
</TABLE>
</BODY></HTML>
<HTML
><HEAD
><TITLE
> Copy Gradient </TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.49"><LINK
REL="HOME"
TITLE="GIMP User Manual"
HREF="../../contents.html"><LINK
REL="UP"
TITLE="Dialogs"
HREF="../../dialogs/index.html"><LINK
REL="PREVIOUS"
TITLE=" Gradient Editor "
HREF="../../dialogs/gradient_editor/gradient_editor.html"><LINK
REL="NEXT"
TITLE=" Delete Gradient "
HREF="../../dialogs/gradient_editor/delete_gradient.html"></HEAD
><BODY
CLASS="SECT1"
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
TEXT="#000000"
><DIV
CLASS="NAVHEADER"
><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TH
COLSPAN="3"
ALIGN="center"
>GIMP User Manual</TH
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../../dialogs/gradient_editor/gradient_editor.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="80%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="bottom"
>Chapter 12. Dialogs</TD
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../../dialogs/gradient_editor/delete_gradient.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="DIALOGS-GRADIENT-EDITOR-COPY-GRADIENT"
><SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Copy Gradient</SPAN
></A
></H1
><A
NAME="AEN2517"
></A
><P
> Lets you specify the name of the copied gradient. The copy will
be stored in your personal <SPAN
CLASS="APPLICATION"
>GIMP</SPAN
>
<TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>gradient</TT
> directory.
</P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../../dialogs/gradient_editor/gradient_editor.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../../contents.html"
>Home</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../../dialogs/gradient_editor/delete_gradient.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
><SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Gradient Editor</SPAN
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../../dialogs/index.html"
>Up</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
><SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Delete Gradient</SPAN
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
></DIV
></BODY
></HTML
>

191
help/C/dialogs/gradient_editor/delete_gradient.html
View File

@ -1,27 +1,164 @@
<!doctype html public "-//w3c//dtd html 4.0 transitional//en">
<HTML>
<HEAD>
<META HTTP-EQUIV="Content-Type" CONTENT="text/html; charset=iso-8859-1">
<TITLE>Delete Gradient</TITLE>
</HEAD>
<BODY text="#000000" bgcolor="#FFFFFF" link="#0000FF" vlink="#FF0000" alink="#000088">
<TABLE width="100%" cellspacing="1" cellpadding="1">
<TR bgcolor="black">
<TD width="100%" align="center"><FONT size="+2" color="white">Delete
Gradient</FONT></TD>
</TR>
<TR bgcolor="white" >
<TD width="100%" align="left"><P>
<P>
Confirmation dialog if you really want to delete the gradient. Remember that
you will some times will not delete the Gradient for real due to access rights.
But you better be sure (specially under Win32) otherwise you will not be
able to redo the delete. However if you due to permission rights not are
entitled to delete the Gradient for real it will be deleted for the rest
of your present Gimp Session and appear the next time you start Gimp.
<P>
<A href="index.html">Index</A>
</TD>
</TR>
</TABLE>
</BODY></HTML>
<HTML
><HEAD
><TITLE
> Delete Gradient </TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.49"><LINK
REL="HOME"
TITLE="GIMP User Manual"
HREF="../../contents.html"><LINK
REL="UP"
TITLE="Dialogs"
HREF="../../dialogs/index.html"><LINK
REL="PREVIOUS"
TITLE=" Copy Gradient "
HREF="../../dialogs/gradient_editor/copy_gradient.html"><LINK
REL="NEXT"
TITLE=" New Gradient "
HREF="../../dialogs/gradient_editor/new_gradient.html"></HEAD
><BODY
CLASS="SECT1"
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
TEXT="#000000"
><DIV
CLASS="NAVHEADER"
><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TH
COLSPAN="3"
ALIGN="center"
>GIMP User Manual</TH
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../../dialogs/gradient_editor/copy_gradient.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="80%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="bottom"
>Chapter 12. Dialogs</TD
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../../dialogs/gradient_editor/new_gradient.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="DELETE-GRADIENT"
><SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Delete Gradient</SPAN
></A
></H1
><A
NAME="AEN2525"
></A
><P
> A confirmation dialog asks if you really want to delete the
gradient. Remember that sometimes you cannot actually delete the
gradient because you lack the necessary rights to the file. But
you better be sure (especially under
<SPAN
CLASS="PRODUCTNAME"
>Win32</SPAN
>) because you will not be able
to undo the delete. However, if you are not entitled to delete the
Gradient, it will be deleted from the rest of your present
<SPAN
CLASS="APPLICATION"
>GIMP</SPAN
> Session and reappear the next time
you start <SPAN
CLASS="APPLICATION"
>GIMP</SPAN
>.
</P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../../dialogs/gradient_editor/copy_gradient.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../../contents.html"
>Home</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../../dialogs/gradient_editor/new_gradient.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
><SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Copy Gradient</SPAN
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../../dialogs/index.html"
>Up</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
><SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>New Gradient</SPAN
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
></DIV
></BODY
></HTML
>

449
help/C/dialogs/gradient_editor/gradient_editor.html
View File

@ -1,88 +1,361 @@
<!doctype html public "-//w3c//dtd html 4.0 transitional//en">
<HTML>
<HEAD>
<META HTTP-EQUIV="Content-Type" CONTENT="text/html; charset=iso-8859-1">
<TITLE>The Gradient Editor</TITLE>
</HEAD>
<BODY text="#000000" bgcolor="#FFFFFF" link="#0000FF" vlink="#FF0000" alink="#000088">
<TABLE width="100%" cellspacing="1" cellpadding="1">
<TR bgcolor="black">
<TD width="100%" align="center"><FONT size="+2" color="white">The Gradient
Editor</FONT></TD>
</TR>
<TR bgcolor="white" >
<TD width="100%" align="left"><P>
<P>
The Gradient Editor allows you to create or edit complex gradients that you
can use with e.g the blend tool.
<P>
You'll find a list of all available gradients under Gradients, and the currently
selected gradient can be seen in a preview window. &nbsp; The buttons to
the right let you create, copy, delete, save and refresh gradients and save
as POV-Ray format. You can also zoom the gradient with the zoom buttons present
in the main dialog.
<P>
The triangles at the bottom of the gradient preview window are color section
markings. Two kinds of marks exist: black endpoints and white midpoints.
The area between two black points is called a segment. You select a segment
by clicking on it. A selected segment turns a darker shade of gray. Most
work that you do in the gradient editor will be about changing and editing
those segments in one way or another.
<P>
&#176; You can move an entire selection by clicking in the darker gray field
and dragging.
<P>
&#176; If you move a white midpoint and affect the color transition by dragging
it.
<P>
&#176; Dragging a black endpoint &nbsp;will stretch the area between that
endpoint and the midpoint
<P>
&#176; If you click on an endpoint, then press Shift and drag, you will compress
or expand the entire selection.
<P>
&#176; You can extend or add to a selection by pressing the Shift key and
clicking on another segment.
<P>
Any of the described manipulations can be used on extended selections.
<H4>
The Popup Menu
</H4>
<P>
If you press the right mouse button in the gradient preview window, a menu
will appear for further editing of the selected segment.
<P>
You can edit the left or right color by invoking left or right endpoint color.
The Load from and Save to menu options allow you to load a color from an
RGBA channel to an endpoint,or to save a RGBA channel.
<P>
In the Blending function for segment submenu, you will find some functions
that control how the appearance of the gradient in your selection.
<P>
The coloring type for segment submenu lets you choose a color model for your
selection or segment. You can choose Plain RGB and two kinds of HSV.
<P>
The Segment commands will work on the selected segment. If you have selected
more than one segment, they will not be treated as a unit.
<P>
&#176; Split segment at midpoint: Puts an endpoint at the midpoint and then
divides the two new segments.
<P>
&#176; Split segment uniformly: Splits to a specified amount o f segments.
<P>
&#176; Delete segment: Deletes the entire selection.
<P>
&#176; Re-center segment's midpoint: Re-centers the midpoints
<P>
&#176; Re-distribute handles in segment: Evenly distributes all the points
in the segment.
<P>
The Selection operations submenu allows you to flip or replicate the segment
and also allows you to blend the endpoints' colors and/or
opacity.
<P>
<A href="index.html">Index</A>
</TD>
</TR>
</TABLE>
</BODY></HTML>
<HTML
><HEAD
><TITLE
> Gradient Editor </TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.49"><LINK
REL="HOME"
TITLE="GIMP User Manual"
HREF="../../contents.html"><LINK
REL="UP"
TITLE="Dialogs"
HREF="../../dialogs/index.html"><LINK
REL="PREVIOUS"
TITLE=" The Gradient Selection Dialog"
HREF="../../dialogs/gradient_selection.html"><LINK
REL="NEXT"
TITLE=" Copy Gradient "
HREF="../../dialogs/gradient_editor/copy_gradient.html"></HEAD
><BODY
CLASS="SECT1"
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
TEXT="#000000"
><DIV
CLASS="NAVHEADER"
><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TH
COLSPAN="3"
ALIGN="center"
>GIMP User Manual</TH
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../../dialogs/gradient_selection.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="80%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="bottom"
>Chapter 12. Dialogs</TD
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../../dialogs/gradient_editor/copy_gradient.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="DIALOGS-GRADIENT-EDITOR-GRADIENT-EDITOR"
><SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Gradient Editor</SPAN
></A
></H1
><A
NAME="AEN2452"
></A
><P
> The <SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Gradient Editor</SPAN
> allows you to create or
edit complex gradients that you can use with, for example, the
blend tool.
</P
><P
> You'll find a list of all available gradients under
<SPAN
CLASS="GUILABEL"
>Gradients</SPAN
>, and the currently selected
gradient can be seen in a preview window. The buttons to the right
let you <SPAN
CLASS="GUIBUTTON"
>create</SPAN
>,
<SPAN
CLASS="GUIBUTTON"
>copy</SPAN
>, <SPAN
CLASS="GUIBUTTON"
>delete</SPAN
>,
<SPAN
CLASS="GUIBUTTON"
>save</SPAN
>, <SPAN
CLASS="GUIBUTTON"
>refresh
gradients</SPAN
> and <SPAN
CLASS="GUIBUTTON"
>save as POV-Ray</SPAN
>
format. You can also zoom the gradient with the zoom buttons
present in the main dialog.
</P
><P
> The <SPAN
CLASS="GUIBUTTON"
>triangles</SPAN
> at the bottom of the gradient
preview window are color section markings. Two kinds of marks
exist: black endpoints and white midpoints. The area between two
black points is called a segment. You select a segment simply
click on it. A selected segment turns a darker shade of gray. Most
work that you do in the gradient editor will be about changing and
editing those segments in one way or another.
</P
><P
> <P
></P
><UL
><LI
><P
> You can move an entire selection by clicking in the
<SPAN
CLASS="GUIBUTTON"
>darker</SPAN
> gray field and dragging.
</P
></LI
><LI
><P
> Moving a white midpoint affects the color transition.
</P
></LI
><LI
><P
> Dragging a black endpoint will stretch the area between that
endpoint and the midpoint.
</P
></LI
><LI
><P
> If you click on an endpoint then press
<B
CLASS="KEYCAP"
>Shift</B
> and drag, you will compress or expand
the entire selection.
</P
></LI
><LI
><P
> You can extend or add to a selection by pressing the
<B
CLASS="KEYCAP"
>Shift</B
> key and clicking on another segment.
</P
></LI
></UL
>
</P
><P
> Any of the described manipulations can be used on extended
selections.
</P
><DIV
CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN2482"
>The Popup Menu</A
></H2
><P
> If you press the <SPAN
CLASS="MOUSEBUTTON"
>right</SPAN
> mouse button
in the gradient preview window, a menu will appear for further
editing of the selected segment.
</P
><P
> You can edit the left or right color by invoking left or right
endpoint color. The <SPAN
CLASS="GUIMENUITEM"
>Load From</SPAN
> and
<SPAN
CLASS="GUIMENUITEM"
>Save To</SPAN
> menu options allow you to
load a color from an <SPAN
CLASS="ACRONYM"
>RGBA</SPAN
> channel to an
endpoint or to save an <SPAN
CLASS="ACRONYM"
>RGBA</SPAN
> channel.
</P
><P
> In the <SPAN
CLASS="GUISUBMENU"
>Blending function</SPAN
> submenu from
the <SPAN
CLASS="GUIMENU"
>Segment</SPAN
> menu, you will find some
functions that control the appearance of the gradient in your
selection.
</P
><P
> The <SPAN
CLASS="GUISUBMENU"
>Coloring type</SPAN
> submenu from the
<SPAN
CLASS="GUIMENU"
>segment</SPAN
> menu lets you choose a color model
for your selection or segment. You can choose plain
<SPAN
CLASS="ACRONYM"
>RGB</SPAN
> or one of two kinds of
<SPAN
CLASS="ACRONYM"
>HSV</SPAN
>.
</P
><P
> The Segment commands will work on the selected segment. If you
have selected more than one segment, they will not be treated as
a unit.
</P
><P
> <P
></P
><UL
><LI
><P
> Split segment at midpoint: Puts an endpoint at the
midpoint and then divides the two new segments.
</P
></LI
><LI
><P
> Split segment uniformly: Splits to a specified amount of
segments.
</P
></LI
><LI
><P
> Delete segment: Deletes the entire selection.
</P
></LI
><LI
><P
> Re-center segment's midpoint: Re-centers the midpoints.
</P
></LI
><LI
><P
> Re-distribute handles in segment: Evenly distributes all
the points in the segment.
</P
></LI
></UL
>
</P
><P
> The <SPAN
CLASS="GUISUBMENU"
>Selection operations</SPAN
> submenu allows
you to flip or replicate the segment and also allows you to
blend the endpoints' colors and/or opacity.
</P
></DIV
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../../dialogs/gradient_selection.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../../contents.html"
>Home</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../../dialogs/gradient_editor/copy_gradient.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
>The <SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Gradient Selection</SPAN
> Dialog</TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../../dialogs/index.html"
>Up</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
><SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Copy Gradient</SPAN
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
></DIV
></BODY
></HTML
>

39
help/C/dialogs/gradient_editor/index.html
View File

@ -1,39 +0,0 @@
<!doctype html public "-//w3c//dtd html 4.0 transitional//en">
<html>
<head>
<META HTTP-EQUIV="Content-Type" CONTENT="text/html; charset=iso-8859-1">
<title>Index for gradient_editor</title>
</head>
<body text="#000000" bgcolor="#FFFFFF" link="#0000FF"
vlink="#FF0000" alink="#000088">
<table width="100%" cellspacing="1" cellpadding="1">
<tr bgcolor="black">
<td width="100%" align="center">
<font size="+2" color="white">gradient_editor Index</font>
</td>
</tr>
<tr bgcolor="white" >
<td width="100%" align="left">
<p>
(/dialogs/gradient_editor/index.html)<p>
<a href="../index.html">Top index</a><p>
<p>Topics in this directory:<p>
<a href="copy_gradient.html">copy_gradient</a><br>
<a href="delete_gradient.html">delete_gradient</a><br>
<a href="gradient_editor.html">gradient_editor</a><br>
<a href="new_gradient.html">new_gradient</a><br>
<a href="rename_gradient.html">rename_gradient</a><br>
<a href="replicate_segment.html">replicate_segment</a><br>
<a href="save_as_pov_ray.html">save_as_pov_ray</a><br>
<a href="split_segments_uniformly.html">split_segments_uniformly</a><br>
<p>
/Karin & Olof
<p>
</td>
</tr>
</table>
</body>
</html>

179
help/C/dialogs/gradient_editor/new_gradient.html
View File

@ -1,23 +1,156 @@
<!doctype html public "-//w3c//dtd html 4.0 transitional//en">
<HTML>
<HEAD>
<META HTTP-EQUIV="Content-Type" CONTENT="text/html; charset=iso-8859-1">
<TITLE>New Gradient</TITLE>
</HEAD>
<BODY text="#000000" bgcolor="#FFFFFF" link="#0000FF" vlink="#FF0000" alink="#000088">
<TABLE width="100%" cellspacing="1" cellpadding="1">
<TR bgcolor="black">
<TD width="100%" align="center"><FONT size="+2" color="white">New
Gradient</FONT></TD>
</TR>
<TR bgcolor="white" >
<TD width="100%" align="left"><P>
<P>
Lets you specify the name of the new Gradient. The newly created gradient
will be stored in your personal Gimp gradeint directory.
<P>
<A href="index.html">Index</A>
</TD>
</TR>
</TABLE>
</BODY></HTML>
<HTML
><HEAD
><TITLE
> New Gradient </TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.49"><LINK
REL="HOME"
TITLE="GIMP User Manual"
HREF="../../contents.html"><LINK
REL="UP"
TITLE="Dialogs"
HREF="../../dialogs/index.html"><LINK
REL="PREVIOUS"
TITLE=" Delete Gradient "
HREF="../../dialogs/gradient_editor/delete_gradient.html"><LINK
REL="NEXT"
TITLE=" Rename Gradient "
HREF="../../dialogs/gradient_editor/rename_gradient.html"></HEAD
><BODY
CLASS="SECT1"
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
TEXT="#000000"
><DIV
CLASS="NAVHEADER"
><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TH
COLSPAN="3"
ALIGN="center"
>GIMP User Manual</TH
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../../dialogs/gradient_editor/delete_gradient.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="80%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="bottom"
>Chapter 12. Dialogs</TD
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../../dialogs/gradient_editor/rename_gradient.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="DIALOGS-GRADIENT-EDITOR-NEW-GRADIENT"
><SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>New Gradient</SPAN
></A
></H1
><A
NAME="AEN2534"
></A
><P
> Lets you specify the name of the new gradient. The newly created
gradient will be stored in your personal
<SPAN
CLASS="APPLICATION"
>GIMP</SPAN
> gradient directory
(normally <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>~/gimp-1.1/gradients</TT
>).
</P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../../dialogs/gradient_editor/delete_gradient.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../../contents.html"
>Home</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../../dialogs/gradient_editor/rename_gradient.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
><SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Delete Gradient</SPAN
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../../dialogs/index.html"
>Up</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
><SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Rename Gradient</SPAN
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
></DIV
></BODY
></HTML
>

189
help/C/dialogs/gradient_editor/rename_gradient.html
View File

@ -1,28 +1,161 @@
<!doctype html public "-//w3c//dtd html 4.0 transitional//en">
<HTML>
<HEAD>
<META HTTP-EQUIV="Content-Type" CONTENT="text/html; charset=iso-8859-1">
<TITLE>Rename Gradient</TITLE>
</HEAD>
<BODY text="#000000" bgcolor="#FFFFFF" link="#0000FF" vlink="#FF0000" alink="#000088">
<TABLE width="100%" cellspacing="1" cellpadding="1">
<TR bgcolor="black">
<TD width="100%" align="center"><FONT size="+2" color="white">Rename
Gradient</FONT></TD>
</TR>
<TR bgcolor="white" >
<TD width="100%" align="left"><P>
<P>
Lets you specify the new name for the Gradient. When you rename a Gradient
the renamed Gradient will end up in your personal gimp gradient directory.
However if you have the permission to alter files in the system wide Gimp
Gradient directory the file will be erased from that directory. This means
that other Gimp users on the system will not be able to use the gradient
even if you just renamed it. So you better be sure (specially under Win32)
what you are doing.
<P>
<A href="index.html">Index</A>
</TD>
</TR>
</TABLE>
</BODY></HTML>
<HTML
><HEAD
><TITLE
> Rename Gradient </TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.49"><LINK
REL="HOME"
TITLE="GIMP User Manual"
HREF="../../contents.html"><LINK
REL="UP"
TITLE="Dialogs"
HREF="../../dialogs/index.html"><LINK
REL="PREVIOUS"
TITLE=" New Gradient "
HREF="../../dialogs/gradient_editor/new_gradient.html"><LINK
REL="NEXT"
TITLE=" Replicate Segment "
HREF="../../dialogs/gradient_editor/replicate_segment.html"></HEAD
><BODY
CLASS="SECT1"
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
TEXT="#000000"
><DIV
CLASS="NAVHEADER"
><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TH
COLSPAN="3"
ALIGN="center"
>GIMP User Manual</TH
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../../dialogs/gradient_editor/new_gradient.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="80%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="bottom"
>Chapter 12. Dialogs</TD
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../../dialogs/gradient_editor/replicate_segment.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="DIALOGS-GRADIENT-EDITOR-RENAME-GRADIENT"
><SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Rename Gradient</SPAN
></A
></H1
><A
NAME="AEN2542"
></A
><P
> Lets you specify the new name for the gradient. When you rename a
gradient the renamed gradient will appear in your personal
<SPAN
CLASS="APPLICATION"
>GIMP</SPAN
> gradient directory. If, however,
you have the permission to alter files in the system-wide
<SPAN
CLASS="APPLICATION"
>GIMP</SPAN
> gradient directory, the file will
be erased from that directory. This means that other users on the
system will not be able to use the gradient even if you only
renamed it. So you need to be sure what you are doing. Be fair to
others and don't deprive them of gradients!
</P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../../dialogs/gradient_editor/new_gradient.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../../contents.html"
>Home</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../../dialogs/gradient_editor/replicate_segment.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
><SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>New Gradient</SPAN
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../../dialogs/index.html"
>Up</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
><SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Replicate Segment</SPAN
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
></DIV
></BODY
></HTML
>

171
help/C/dialogs/gradient_editor/replicate_segment.html
View File

@ -1,23 +1,148 @@
<!doctype html public "-//w3c//dtd html 4.0 transitional//en">
<HTML>
<HEAD>
<META HTTP-EQUIV="Content-Type" CONTENT="text/html; charset=iso-8859-1">
<TITLE>Replicate Segment</TITLE>
</HEAD>
<BODY text="#000000" bgcolor="#FFFFFF" link="#0000FF" vlink="#FF0000" alink="#000088">
<TABLE width="100%" cellspacing="1" cellpadding="1">
<TR bgcolor="black">
<TD width="100%" align="center"><FONT size="+2" color="white">Replicate
Segment</FONT></TD>
</TR>
<TR bgcolor="white" >
<TD width="100%" align="left"><P>
<P>
Lets you specify the amount of replicas (copies) that you want to create.
The copies will be squeezed into the original segment's space.
<P>
<A href="index.html">Index</A>
</TD>
</TR>
</TABLE>
</BODY></HTML>
<HTML
><HEAD
><TITLE
> Replicate Segment </TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.49"><LINK
REL="HOME"
TITLE="GIMP User Manual"
HREF="../../contents.html"><LINK
REL="UP"
TITLE="Dialogs"
HREF="../../dialogs/index.html"><LINK
REL="PREVIOUS"
TITLE=" Rename Gradient "
HREF="../../dialogs/gradient_editor/rename_gradient.html"><LINK
REL="NEXT"
TITLE=" Save as PovRay "
HREF="../../dialogs/gradient_editor/save_as_povray.html"></HEAD
><BODY
CLASS="SECT1"
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
TEXT="#000000"
><DIV
CLASS="NAVHEADER"
><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TH
COLSPAN="3"
ALIGN="center"
>GIMP User Manual</TH
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../../dialogs/gradient_editor/rename_gradient.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="80%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="bottom"
>Chapter 12. Dialogs</TD
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../../dialogs/gradient_editor/save_as_povray.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="DIALOGS-GRADIENT-EDITOR-REPLICATE-SEGMENT"
><SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Replicate Segment</SPAN
></A
></H1
><A
NAME="AEN2550"
></A
><P
> Lets you specify the amount of copies that you want to create. The
copies will be squeezed into the original segment's space.
</P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../../dialogs/gradient_editor/rename_gradient.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../../contents.html"
>Home</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../../dialogs/gradient_editor/save_as_povray.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
><SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Rename Gradient</SPAN
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../../dialogs/index.html"
>Up</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
><SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Save as PovRay</SPAN
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
></DIV
></BODY
></HTML
>

23
help/C/dialogs/gradient_editor/save_as_pov_ray.html
View File

@ -1,23 +0,0 @@
<!doctype html public "-//w3c//dtd html 4.0 transitional//en">
<HTML>
<HEAD>
<META HTTP-EQUIV="Content-Type" CONTENT="text/html; charset=iso-8859-1">
<TITLE>Save as Pov-Ray</TITLE>
</HEAD>
<BODY text="#000000" bgcolor="#FFFFFF" link="#0000FF" vlink="#FF0000" alink="#000088">
<TABLE width="100%" cellspacing="1" cellpadding="1">
<TR bgcolor="black">
<TD width="100%" align="center"><FONT size="+2" color="white">Save as
Pov-Ray</FONT></TD>
</TR>
<TR bgcolor="white" >
<TD width="100%" align="left"><P>
<P>
Lets you save your gradient as a Pov-Ray gradient, you have to choose the
location and name of the Pov-Ray gradient.
<P>
<A href="index.html">Index</A>
</TD>
</TR>
</TABLE>
</BODY></HTML>

148
help/C/dialogs/gradient_editor/save_as_povray.html Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,148 @@
<HTML
><HEAD
><TITLE
> Save as PovRay </TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.49"><LINK
REL="HOME"
TITLE="GIMP User Manual"
HREF="../../contents.html"><LINK
REL="UP"
TITLE="Dialogs"
HREF="../../dialogs/index.html"><LINK
REL="PREVIOUS"
TITLE=" Replicate Segment "
HREF="../../dialogs/gradient_editor/replicate_segment.html"><LINK
REL="NEXT"
TITLE=" Split Segments Uniformly "
HREF="../../dialogs/gradient_editor/split_segments_uniformly.html"></HEAD
><BODY
CLASS="SECT1"
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
TEXT="#000000"
><DIV
CLASS="NAVHEADER"
><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TH
COLSPAN="3"
ALIGN="center"
>GIMP User Manual</TH
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../../dialogs/gradient_editor/replicate_segment.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="80%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="bottom"
>Chapter 12. Dialogs</TD
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../../dialogs/gradient_editor/split_segments_uniformly.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="DIALOGS-GRADIENT-EDITOR-SAVE-AS-POVRAY"
><SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Save as PovRay</SPAN
></A
></H1
><A
NAME="AEN2556"
></A
><P
> Lets you save your gradient as a PovRay gradient. You have to choose the
location and name of the PovRay gradient.
</P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../../dialogs/gradient_editor/replicate_segment.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../../contents.html"
>Home</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../../dialogs/gradient_editor/split_segments_uniformly.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
><SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Replicate Segment</SPAN
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../../dialogs/index.html"
>Up</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
><SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Split Segments Uniformly</SPAN
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
></DIV
></BODY
></HTML
>

171
help/C/dialogs/gradient_editor/split_segments_uniformly.html
View File

@ -1,23 +1,148 @@
<!doctype html public "-//w3c//dtd html 4.0 transitional//en">
<HTML>
<HEAD>
<META HTTP-EQUIV="Content-Type" CONTENT="text/html; charset=iso-8859-1">
<TITLE>Split Segments Uniformly</TITLE>
</HEAD>
<BODY text="#000000" bgcolor="#FFFFFF" link="#0000FF" vlink="#FF0000" alink="#000088">
<TABLE width="100%" cellspacing="1" cellpadding="1">
<TR bgcolor="black">
<TD width="100%" align="center"><FONT size="+2" color="white">Split Segments
Uniformly</FONT></TD>
</TR>
<TR bgcolor="white" >
<TD width="100%" align="left"><P>
<P>
Lets you specify the number of subsegments that you want to split up your
segment in.
<P>
<A href="index.html">Index</A>
</TD>
</TR>
</TABLE>
</BODY></HTML>
<HTML
><HEAD
><TITLE
> Split Segments Uniformly </TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.49"><LINK
REL="HOME"
TITLE="GIMP User Manual"
HREF="../../contents.html"><LINK
REL="UP"
TITLE="Dialogs"
HREF="../../dialogs/index.html"><LINK
REL="PREVIOUS"
TITLE=" Save as PovRay "
HREF="../../dialogs/gradient_editor/save_as_povray.html"><LINK
REL="NEXT"
TITLE="The Pattern Selection Dialog"
HREF="../../dialogs/pattern_selection.html"></HEAD
><BODY
CLASS="SECT1"
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
TEXT="#000000"
><DIV
CLASS="NAVHEADER"
><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TH
COLSPAN="3"
ALIGN="center"
>GIMP User Manual</TH
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../../dialogs/gradient_editor/save_as_povray.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="80%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="bottom"
>Chapter 12. Dialogs</TD
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../../dialogs/pattern_selection.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="DIALOGS-GRADIENT-EDITOR-SPLIT-SEGMENTS-UNIFORMLY"
><SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Split Segments Uniformly</SPAN
></A
></H1
><A
NAME="AEN2562"
></A
><P
> Lets you specify the number of subsegments into which your segment
should be divided.
</P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../../dialogs/gradient_editor/save_as_povray.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../../contents.html"
>Home</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../../dialogs/pattern_selection.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
><SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Save as PovRay</SPAN
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../../dialogs/index.html"
>Up</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
>The <SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Pattern Selection</SPAN
> Dialog</TD
></TR
></TABLE
></DIV
></BODY
></HTML
>

206
help/C/dialogs/gradient_selection.html
View File

@ -1,30 +1,176 @@
<!doctype html public "-//w3c//dtd html 4.0 transitional//en">
<HTML>
<HEAD>
<META HTTP-EQUIV="Content-Type" CONTENT="text/html; charset=iso-8859-1">
<TITLE>The Gradient Selection Dialog</TITLE>
</HEAD>
<BODY text="#000000" bgcolor="#FFFFFF" link="#0000FF" vlink="#FF0000" alink="#000088">
<TABLE width="100%" cellspacing="1" cellpadding="1">
<TR bgcolor="black">
<TD width="100%" align="center"><FONT size="+2" color="white">The Gradient
Selection Dialog</FONT></TD>
</TR>
<TR bgcolor="white" >
<TD width="100%" align="left"><P>
<P>
Lets you choose the gradient that should be the currently active one. You
are also able to edit the gradient by pressing the edit button. This will
bring up the <A HREF="gradient_editor/gradient_editor.html">Gradient
editor</A>.
<H3>
Additional Information
</H3>
<P>
Default Keyboard Shortcut: Ctrl+G
<P>
<A href="index.html">Index</A>
</TD>
</TR>
</TABLE>
</BODY></HTML>
<HTML
><HEAD
><TITLE
> The Gradient Selection Dialog</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.49"><LINK
REL="HOME"
TITLE="GIMP User Manual"
HREF="../contents.html"><LINK
REL="UP"
TITLE="Dialogs"
HREF="../dialogs/index.html"><LINK
REL="PREVIOUS"
TITLE=" Brush Editor "
HREF="../dialogs/brush_editor.html"><LINK
REL="NEXT"
TITLE=" Gradient Editor "
HREF="../dialogs/gradient_editor/gradient_editor.html"></HEAD
><BODY
CLASS="SECT1"
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
TEXT="#000000"
><DIV
CLASS="NAVHEADER"
><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TH
COLSPAN="3"
ALIGN="center"
>GIMP User Manual</TH
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../dialogs/brush_editor.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="80%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="bottom"
>Chapter 12. Dialogs</TD
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../dialogs/gradient_editor/gradient_editor.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="DIALOGS-GRADIENT-SELECTION"
>The <SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Gradient Selection</SPAN
> Dialog</A
></H1
><A
NAME="AEN2437"
></A
><P
> Lets you select a gradient. You are also able to edit the gradient
by pressing the <SPAN
CLASS="GUIBUTTON"
>edit</SPAN
> button. This will
bring up the <A
HREF="../dialogs/gradient_editor/gradient_editor.html"
> <SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Gradient Editor</SPAN
></A
>.
</P
><DIV
CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN2443"
>Additional Information</A
></H2
><P
> Default Keyboard Shortcut: <B
CLASS="KEYCAP"
>Ctrl</B
>-<B
CLASS="KEYCAP"
>G</B
>
</P
></DIV
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../dialogs/brush_editor.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../contents.html"
>Home</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../dialogs/gradient_editor/gradient_editor.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
><SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Brush Editor</SPAN
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../dialogs/index.html"
>Up</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
><SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Gradient Editor</SPAN
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
></DIV
></BODY
></HTML
>

172
help/C/dialogs/grow_selection.html
View File

@ -1,23 +1,149 @@
<!doctype html public "-//w3c//dtd html 4.0 transitional//en">
<HTML>
<HEAD>
<META HTTP-EQUIV="Content-Type" CONTENT="text/html; charset=iso-8859-1">
<TITLE>Grow Selection</TITLE>
</HEAD>
<BODY text="#000000" bgcolor="#FFFFFF" link="#0000FF" vlink="#FF0000" alink="#000088">
<TABLE width="100%" cellspacing="1" cellpadding="1">
<TR bgcolor="black">
<TD width="100%" align="center"><FONT size="+2" color="white">Grow
Selection</FONT></TD>
</TR>
<TR bgcolor="white" >
<TD width="100%" align="left"><P>
<P>
Lets you specify the amount (usually in pixels, but you can set it to a real
unit) to grow the current selection with.
<P>
<A href="index.html">Index</A>
</TD>
</TR>
</TABLE>
</BODY></HTML>
<HTML
><HEAD
><TITLE
>Grow Selection</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.49"><LINK
REL="HOME"
TITLE="GIMP User Manual"
HREF="../contents.html"><LINK
REL="UP"
TITLE="Image"
HREF="../image/index.html"><LINK
REL="PREVIOUS"
TITLE="Shrink Selection"
HREF="../dialogs/shrink_selection.html"><LINK
REL="NEXT"
TITLE="Border Selection"
HREF="../dialogs/border_selection.html"></HEAD
><BODY
CLASS="SECT1"
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
TEXT="#000000"
><DIV
CLASS="NAVHEADER"
><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TH
COLSPAN="3"
ALIGN="center"
>GIMP User Manual</TH
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../dialogs/shrink_selection.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="80%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="bottom"
>Chapter 4. Image</TD
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../dialogs/border_selection.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="DIALOGS-GROW-SELECTION"
><SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Grow Selection</SPAN
></A
></H1
><A
NAME="AEN898"
></A
><P
> Will grow the selection (not the content of the selection but
the selection itself) by an arbitrary amount measured in the
set unit (usually pixels).
</P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../dialogs/shrink_selection.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../contents.html"
>Home</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../dialogs/border_selection.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
><SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Shrink Selection</SPAN
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../image/index.html"
>Up</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
><SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Border Selection</SPAN
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
></DIV
></BODY
></HTML
>

275
help/C/dialogs/help.html
View File

@ -1,37 +1,238 @@
<!doctype html public "-//w3c//dtd html 4.0 transitional//en">
<HTML>
<HEAD>
<META HTTP-EQUIV="Content-Type" CONTENT="text/html; charset=iso-8859-1">
<TITLE>Help Page for Help</TITLE>
</HEAD>
<BODY text="#000000" bgcolor="#FFFFFF" link="#0000FF" vlink="#FF0000" alink="#000088">
<TABLE width="100%" cellspacing="1" cellpadding="1">
<TR bgcolor="black">
<TD width="100%" align="center"><FONT size="+2" color="white">Help Page</FONT></TD>
</TR>
<TR bgcolor="white" >
<TD width="100%" align="left"><P>
<P>
Well what about a help page for a help. In the Help Dialog you will see
three note book tabs. Index, Context and the current help page (this is the
tab you are reading this text in).
<P>
In the Index tab you will find links to most of the subject in the Gimp help
system. In the Content tab you will find links built up of a hirarcy. This
will enable you to find all help pages about a special area of Gimp e.g all
help pages about selections.
<P>
You can invoke the help system either by pressing F1 in a Gimp dialog or
window, but also by pressing F1 when a menu item is active. E.I. go into
a menu and hover over a menu &nbsp;entry e.g Grow, no press F1 and the help
page for Grow will be loaded in the Help browser.
<P>
If you press &lt;Shift&gt;-F1 then you will get a ? sign which you can point
and click in buttons and other context items in Gimp. If the item is contexted
help enabled then the help page for that item is loaded into the Help browser.
<P>
<A href="index.html">Index</A>
</TD>
</TR>
</TABLE>
</BODY></HTML>
<HTML
><HEAD
><TITLE
>Help Page for Help</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.49"><LINK
REL="HOME"
TITLE="GIMP User Manual"
HREF="../contents.html"><LINK
REL="UP"
TITLE="ToolBox"
HREF="../toolbox/index.html"><LINK
REL="PREVIOUS"
TITLE="Module Browser"
HREF="../dialogs/module_browser.html"><LINK
REL="NEXT"
TITLE="Context Help"
HREF="../toolbox/help/context_help.html"></HEAD
><BODY
CLASS="SECT1"
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
TEXT="#000000"
><DIV
CLASS="NAVHEADER"
><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TH
COLSPAN="3"
ALIGN="center"
>GIMP User Manual</TH
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../dialogs/module_browser.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="80%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="bottom"
>Chapter 3. ToolBox</TD
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../toolbox/help/context_help.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="HELP"
>Help Page for <SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Help</SPAN
></A
></H1
><A
NAME="AEN559"
></A
><P
> Well, what about a help page for a help. In the
<SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Help</SPAN
> Dialog, if you are using the
<SPAN
CLASS="APPLICATION"
>GIMP</SPAN
>
<SPAN
CLASS="APPLICATION"
>help browser</SPAN
>, you will see three tabs
&mdash; <SPAN
CLASS="GUILABEL"
>Index</SPAN
>, <SPAN
CLASS="GUILABEL"
>Contents</SPAN
>,
and the current help page (this is the tab where you are reading
this text).
</P
><P
> In the <SPAN
CLASS="GUILABEL"
>Index</SPAN
> tab you will find links to most
of the subjects in the <SPAN
CLASS="APPLICATION"
>GIMP</SPAN
> help
system. In the <SPAN
CLASS="GUILABEL"
>Contents</SPAN
> tab you will find
links built up of a hierarchy. This will enable you to find all
help pages about a special area of <SPAN
CLASS="APPLICATION"
>GIMP</SPAN
>
(e.g all help pages about selections).
</P
><P
> You can invoke the help system either by pressing
<B
CLASS="KEYCAP"
>F1</B
> in a <SPAN
CLASS="APPLICATION"
>GIMP</SPAN
> dialog or
window or by pressing <B
CLASS="KEYCAP"
>F1</B
> when a menu item is
active. For example, go into a menu and hover over a menuentry,
such as <SPAN
CLASS="GUIMENUITEM"
>Grow</SPAN
>, now press
<B
CLASS="KEYCAP"
>F1</B
> and the help page for
<SPAN
CLASS="GUIMENUITEM"
>Grow</SPAN
> will be loaded into the
<SPAN
CLASS="APPLICATION"
>help browser</SPAN
>.
</P
><P
> If you press <B
CLASS="KEYCAP"
>Shift</B
>-<B
CLASS="KEYCAP"
>F1</B
> then you will get a
<SPAN
CLASS="GUIICON"
>?</SPAN
> sign which you can point and click on buttons
and other items in <SPAN
CLASS="APPLICATION"
>GIMP</SPAN
>. If the item
has help available, the help document is loaded into the
<SPAN
CLASS="APPLICATION"
>help browser</SPAN
>.
</P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../dialogs/module_browser.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../contents.html"
>Home</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../toolbox/help/context_help.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
><SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Module Browser</SPAN
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../toolbox/index.html"
>Up</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
>Context Help</TD
></TR
></TABLE
></DIV
></BODY
></HTML
>

520
help/C/dialogs/index.html
View File

@ -1,76 +1,444 @@
<!doctype html public "-//w3c//dtd html 4.0 transitional//en">
<html>
<head>
<META HTTP-EQUIV="Content-Type" CONTENT="text/html; charset=iso-8859-1">
<title>Index for dialogs</title>
</head>
<body text="#000000" bgcolor="#FFFFFF" link="#0000FF"
vlink="#FF0000" alink="#000088">
<table width="100%" cellspacing="1" cellpadding="1">
<tr bgcolor="black">
<td width="100%" align="center">
<font size="+2" color="white">dialogs Index</font>
</td>
</tr>
<tr bgcolor="white" >
<td width="100%" align="left">
<p>
(/dialogs/index.html)<p>
<a href="../index.html">Top index</a><p>
Subtopics available:<p>
<a href="channels/index.html">channels</a><br>
<a href="layers/index.html">layers</a><br>
<a href="color_selectors/index.html">color_selectors</a><br>
<a href="display_filters/index.html">display_filters</a><br>
<a href="gradient_editor/index.html">gradient_editor</a><br>
<a href="palette_editor/index.html">palette_editor</a><br>
<a href="paths/index.html">paths</a><br>
<a href="preferences/index.html">preferences</a><br>
<p>Topics in this directory:<p>
<a href="about.html">about</a><br>
<a href="border_selection.html">border_selection</a><br>
<a href="brush_editor.html">brush_editor</a><br>
<a href="brush_selection.html">brush_selection</a><br>
<a href="convert_to_indexed.html">convert_to_indexed</a><br>
<a href="copy_named.html">copy_named</a><br>
<a href="cut_named.html">cut_named</a><br>
<a href="device_status.html">device_status</a><br>
<a href="document_index.html">document_index</a><br>
<a href="edit_qmask_attributes.html">edit_qmask_attributes</a><br>
<a href="error_console.html">error_console</a><br>
<a href="feather_selection.html">feather_selection</a><br>
<a href="file_new.html">file_new</a><br>
<a href="file_open.html">file_open</a><br>
<a href="file_save.html">file_save</a><br>
<a href="gradient_selection.html">gradient_selection</a><br>
<a href="grow_selection.html">grow_selection</a><br>
<a href="help.html">help</a><br>
<a href="indexed_palette.html">indexed_palette</a><br>
<a href="info_window.html">info_window</a><br>
<a href="input_devices.html">input_devices</a><br>
<a href="layers_and_channels.html">layers_and_channels</a><br>
<a href="module_browser.html">module_browser</a><br>
<a href="navigation_window.html">navigation_window</a><br>
<a href="offset.html">offset</a><br>
<a href="palette_selection.html">palette_selection</a><br>
<a href="paste_named.html">paste_named</a><br>
<a href="pattern_selection.html">pattern_selection</a><br>
<a href="really_close.html">really_close</a><br>
<a href="really_quit.html">really_quit</a><br>
<a href="scale_image.html">scale_image</a><br>
<a href="set_canvas_size.html">set_canvas_size</a><br>
<a href="shrink_selection.html">shrink_selection</a><br>
<a href="tip_of_the_day.html">tip_of_the_day</a><br>
<a href="tool_options.html">tool_options</a><br>
<a href="undo_history.html">undo_history</a><br>
<p>
/Karin & Olof
<p>
</td>
</tr>
</table>
</body>
</html>
<HTML
><HEAD
><TITLE
>Dialogs</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.49"><LINK
REL="HOME"
TITLE="GIMP User Manual"
HREF="../contents.html"><LINK
REL="PREVIOUS"
TITLE="Save by Extension"
HREF="../save/save_by_extension.html"><LINK
REL="NEXT"
TITLE="Layers, Channels and Paths Dialog"
HREF="../dialogs/layers_and_channels.html"></HEAD
><BODY
CLASS="CHAPTER"
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
TEXT="#000000"
><DIV
CLASS="NAVHEADER"
><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TH
COLSPAN="3"
ALIGN="center"
>GIMP User Manual</TH
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../save/save_by_extension.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="80%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="bottom"
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../dialogs/layers_and_channels.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="CHAPTER"
><H1
><A
NAME="DIALOGS-CHAPTER"
>Chapter 12. Dialogs</A
></H1
><DIV
CLASS="TOC"
><DL
><DT
><B
>Table of Contents</B
></DT
><DT
><A
HREF="../dialogs/index.html#DIALOGS-DIALOGS-INTRODUCTION"
>Dialogs Introduction</A
></DT
><DT
><A
HREF="../dialogs/layers_and_channels.html"
><SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Layers, Channels and Paths</SPAN
> Dialog</A
></DT
><DT
><A
HREF="../dialogs/preferences/preferences.html"
>The Preferences Dialog</A
></DT
><DT
><A
HREF="../dialogs/preferences/new_file.html"
>New File Settings</A
></DT
><DT
><A
HREF="../dialogs/preferences/interface.html"
>Interface Settings</A
></DT
><DT
><A
HREF="../dialogs/preferences/display.html"
>Display Settings</A
></DT
><DT
><A
HREF="../dialogs/preferences/environment.html"
>Environment Settings</A
></DT
><DT
><A
HREF="../dialogs/preferences/session.html"
>Session Management</A
></DT
><DT
><A
HREF="../dialogs/preferences/monitor.html"
>Monitor Resolution</A
></DT
><DT
><A
HREF="../dialogs/preferences/directories.html"
>Directories</A
></DT
><DT
><A
HREF="../dialogs/brush_selection.html"
>The <SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Brush Selection</SPAN
> Dialog</A
></DT
><DT
><A
HREF="../dialogs/brush_editor.html"
><SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Brush Editor</SPAN
></A
></DT
><DT
><A
HREF="../dialogs/gradient_selection.html"
>The <SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Gradient Selection</SPAN
> Dialog</A
></DT
><DT
><A
HREF="../dialogs/gradient_editor/gradient_editor.html"
><SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Gradient Editor</SPAN
></A
></DT
><DT
><A
HREF="../dialogs/gradient_editor/copy_gradient.html"
><SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Copy Gradient</SPAN
></A
></DT
><DT
><A
HREF="../dialogs/gradient_editor/delete_gradient.html"
><SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Delete Gradient</SPAN
></A
></DT
><DT
><A
HREF="../dialogs/gradient_editor/new_gradient.html"
><SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>New Gradient</SPAN
></A
></DT
><DT
><A
HREF="../dialogs/gradient_editor/rename_gradient.html"
><SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Rename Gradient</SPAN
></A
></DT
><DT
><A
HREF="../dialogs/gradient_editor/replicate_segment.html"
><SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Replicate Segment</SPAN
></A
></DT
><DT
><A
HREF="../dialogs/gradient_editor/save_as_povray.html"
><SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Save as PovRay</SPAN
></A
></DT
><DT
><A
HREF="../dialogs/gradient_editor/split_segments_uniformly.html"
><SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Split Segments Uniformly</SPAN
></A
></DT
><DT
><A
HREF="../dialogs/pattern_selection.html"
>The <SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Pattern Selection</SPAN
> Dialog</A
></DT
><DT
><A
HREF="../dialogs/palette_selection.html"
>The <SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Color Palette</SPAN
> Dialog</A
></DT
><DT
><A
HREF="../dialogs/palette_editor/palette_editor.html"
>The Palette Editor</A
></DT
><DT
><A
HREF="../dialogs/palette_editor/delete_palette.html"
>Delete Palette</A
></DT
><DT
><A
HREF="../dialogs/palette_editor/import_palette.html"
>Import Palette</A
></DT
><DT
><A
HREF="../dialogs/palette_editor/merge_palette.html"
>Merge Palette</A
></DT
><DT
><A
HREF="../dialogs/palette_editor/new_palette.html"
>New Palette</A
></DT
><DT
><A
HREF="../dialogs/indexed_palette.html"
><SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Indexed Palette</SPAN
></A
></DT
><DT
><A
HREF="../dialogs/input_devices.html"
>Input Devices</A
></DT
><DT
><A
HREF="../dialogs/device_status.html"
>The <SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Device Status</SPAN
> Dialog</A
></DT
><DT
><A
HREF="../dialogs/document_index.html"
>The <SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Document Index</SPAN
> Dialog</A
></DT
><DT
><A
HREF="../dialogs/error_console.html"
>The <SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Error Console</SPAN
> Dialog</A
></DT
><DT
><A
HREF="../dialogs/display_filters/display_filters.html"
>The <SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Display Filters</SPAN
> Dialog</A
></DT
><DT
><A
HREF="../dialogs/display_filters/gamma.html"
>The Gamma Display Filter</A
></DT
><DT
><A
HREF="../dialogs/display_filters/highcontrast.html"
>The High Contrast Display Filter</A
></DT
><DT
><A
HREF="../dialogs/undo_history.html"
><SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Undo History</SPAN
></A
></DT
><DT
><A
HREF="../dialogs/color_selectors/built_in.html"
>The <SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Standard GIMP Color Selector</SPAN
></A
></DT
><DT
><A
HREF="../dialogs/color_selectors/gtk.html"
>The <SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>GTK Color Selector</SPAN
></A
></DT
><DT
><A
HREF="../dialogs/color_selectors/triangle.html"
>The <SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Triangle Color Selector</SPAN
></A
></DT
><DT
><A
HREF="../dialogs/color_selectors/watercolor.html"
>The <SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Watercolor Color</SPAN
> Selector</A
></DT
><DT
><A
HREF="../dialogs/edit_qmask_attributes.html"
><SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Edit Qmask Attributes</SPAN
></A
></DT
></DL
></DIV
><A
NAME="AEN2149"
></A
><DIV
CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="DIALOGS-DIALOGS-INTRODUCTION"
>Dialogs Introduction</A
></H1
><A
NAME="AEN2153"
></A
><P
> This chapter contains destriptions of all
<SPAN
CLASS="APPLICATION"
>GIMP</SPAN
> dialogs.
</P
></DIV
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../save/save_by_extension.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../contents.html"
>Home</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../dialogs/layers_and_channels.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
>Save by Extension</TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
>&nbsp;</TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
><SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Layers, Channels and Paths</SPAN
> Dialog</TD
></TR
></TABLE
></DIV
></BODY
></HTML
>

240
help/C/dialogs/indexed_palette.html
View File

@ -1,46 +1,194 @@
<!doctype html public "-//w3c//dtd html 4.0 transitional//en">
<HTML>
<HEAD>
<META HTTP-EQUIV="Content-Type" CONTENT="text/html; charset=iso-8859-1">
<TITLE>Indexed Palette</TITLE>
</HEAD>
<BODY text="#000000" bgcolor="#FFFFFF" link="#0000FF" vlink="#FF0000" alink="#000088">
<TABLE width="100%" cellspacing="1" cellpadding="1">
<TR bgcolor="black">
<TD width="100%" align="center"><FONT size="+2" color="white">Indexed
Palette</FONT></TD>
</TR>
<TR bgcolor="white" >
<TD width="100%" align="left"><P>
<P>
Allows you to edit and alter the palette present in an indexed
image. Remember
that you can only paint with the colors present in your indexed palette.
This is why it's very handy to be able to add or alter colors in
the palette.
<P>
<DL>
<DT>
<EM>Altering a color:</EM>
<DD>
Choose the color that you want to alter by clicking on it<BR>
Choose edit from the Operation menu. This will bring up the
GIMP color selector which enables you to pick a replacement color.
<DT>
<EM>Adding a color:</EM>
<DD>
If your indexed image contains less that 256 colors then you
can add a color
to the palette.<BR>
Choose add from the Operation menu. A new color will appear
as the last color in the palette. The new palette color is a
copy of the previous entry
in the palette. You are now free to alter the color and paint
with it in your indexed image.
</DL>
<P>
<A href="index.html">Index</A>
</TD>
</TR>
</TABLE>
</BODY></HTML>
<HTML
><HEAD
><TITLE
> Indexed Palette </TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.49"><LINK
REL="HOME"
TITLE="GIMP User Manual"
HREF="../contents.html"><LINK
REL="UP"
TITLE="Dialogs"
HREF="../dialogs/index.html"><LINK
REL="PREVIOUS"
TITLE="New Palette"
HREF="../dialogs/palette_editor/new_palette.html"><LINK
REL="NEXT"
TITLE="Input Devices"
HREF="../dialogs/input_devices.html"></HEAD
><BODY
CLASS="SECT1"
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
TEXT="#000000"
><DIV
CLASS="NAVHEADER"
><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TH
COLSPAN="3"
ALIGN="center"
>GIMP User Manual</TH
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../dialogs/palette_editor/new_palette.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="80%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="bottom"
>Chapter 12. Dialogs</TD
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../dialogs/input_devices.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="DIALOGS-INDEXED-PALETTE"
><SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Indexed Palette</SPAN
></A
></H1
><A
NAME="AEN2706"
></A
><P
> Allows you to edit and alter the palette present in an indexed
image. Remember that you can only paint with the colors present
in your indexed palette. This is why it's very handy to be able
to add or alter colors in the palette.
</P
><P
> <P
></P
><DL
><DT
>Altering a color</DT
><DD
><P
> Choose the color that you want to alter by clicking on it.
Choose <SPAN
CLASS="GUIBUTTON"
>edit</SPAN
> from the
<SPAN
CLASS="GUIMENU"
>Operation</SPAN
> menu. This will bring up the
<SPAN
CLASS="APPLICATION"
>GIMP</SPAN
> <SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>color
selector</SPAN
> which enables you to pick a
replacement color.
</P
></DD
><DT
>Adding a color</DT
><DD
><P
> If your indexed image contains less that 256 colors, then
you can add a color. Choose <SPAN
CLASS="GUIBUTTON"
>Add</SPAN
>
from the <SPAN
CLASS="GUIMENU"
>Operation</SPAN
> menu. A new color
will appear as the last color in the palette. The new
palette color is a copy the previous color in the palette.
You are now free to alter the color and use it in your
image.
</P
></DD
></DL
>
</P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../dialogs/palette_editor/new_palette.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../contents.html"
>Home</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../dialogs/input_devices.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
>New Palette</TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../dialogs/index.html"
>Up</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
>Input Devices</TD
></TR
></TABLE
></DIV
></BODY
></HTML
>

331
help/C/dialogs/info_window.html
View File

@ -1,69 +1,262 @@
<!doctype html public "-//w3c//dtd html 4.0 transitional//en">
<HTML>
<HEAD>
<META HTTP-EQUIV="Content-Type" CONTENT="text/html; charset=iso-8859-1">
<TITLE>Info Window</TITLE>
</HEAD>
<BODY text="#000000" bgcolor="#FFFFFF" link="#0000FF" vlink="#FF0000" alink="#000088">
<TABLE width="100%" cellspacing="1" cellpadding="1">
<TR bgcolor="black">
<TD width="100%" align="center"><FONT size="+2" color="white">Info
Window</FONT></TD>
</TR>
<TR bgcolor="white" >
<TD width="100%" align="left"><P>
<H4>
The General Tab folder
</H4>
<P>
<DL>
<DT>
<EM>Dimension (w x h):</EM>
<DD>
Shows the image height and width both in pixels and in the current
unit.
<DT>
<EM>Resolution:</EM>
<DD>
Shows the current resolution.
<DT>
<EM>Scale Ratio:</EM>
<DD>
Shows the current zoom factor.
<DT>
<EM>Display Type:</EM>
<DD>
Shows the current image mode.
<DT>
<EM>Visual Class:</EM>
<DD>
Shows the visual class of your display.
<DT>
<EM>Visual Depth:</EM>
<DD>
Shows the visual depth of your display.
<DT>
</DL>
<H4>
The Extended <A href="index.html"></A>Tab folder
</H4>
<P>
Shows you the current pixel value while you moving the pointer
over the image
without pressing any buttons, In effect, it is a color picker
that does not affect the
current color, but instead gives you the pixel value regardless
of the current
tool or color. For information how to interpret the pixel value, see the
<A HREF="../tools/color_picker.html">Color Picker</A> tool.
<H3>
Additional Information
</H3>
<P>
Default Keyboard Shortcut: Ctrl+Shift+I
<P>
<A href="index.html">Index</A>
</TD>
</TR>
</TABLE>
</BODY></HTML>
<HTML
><HEAD
><TITLE
>Info Window</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.49"><LINK
REL="HOME"
TITLE="GIMP User Manual"
HREF="../contents.html"><LINK
REL="UP"
TITLE="Image"
HREF="../image/index.html"><LINK
REL="PREVIOUS"
TITLE="Dot for Dot"
HREF="../image/view/dot_for_dot.html"><LINK
REL="NEXT"
TITLE=" Navigation Window "
HREF="../dialogs/navigation_window.html"></HEAD
><BODY
CLASS="SECT1"
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
TEXT="#000000"
><DIV
CLASS="NAVHEADER"
><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TH
COLSPAN="3"
ALIGN="center"
>GIMP User Manual</TH
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../image/view/dot_for_dot.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="80%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="bottom"
>Chapter 4. Image</TD
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../dialogs/navigation_window.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="INFO-WINDOW"
><SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Info Window</SPAN
></A
></H1
><A
NAME="AEN935"
></A
><DIV
CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN937"
>The <SPAN
CLASS="GUILABEL"
>General</SPAN
> Tab</A
></H2
><P
></P
><DL
><DT
><SPAN
CLASS="GUILABEL"
>Dimension (w x h)</SPAN
></DT
><DD
><P
> Shows the image height and width both in pixels and in the
current unit.
</P
></DD
><DT
><SPAN
CLASS="GUILABEL"
>Resolution</SPAN
></DT
><DD
><P
> Shows the current resolution.
</P
></DD
><DT
><SPAN
CLASS="GUILABEL"
>Scale Ratio</SPAN
></DT
><DD
><P
> Shows the current zoom factor.
</P
></DD
><DT
><SPAN
CLASS="GUILABEL"
>Display Type</SPAN
></DT
><DD
><P
> Shows the current image mode.
</P
></DD
><DT
><SPAN
CLASS="GUILABEL"
>Visual Class</SPAN
></DT
><DD
><P
> Shows the visual class of your display.
</P
></DD
><DT
><SPAN
CLASS="GUILABEL"
>Visual Depth</SPAN
></DT
><DD
><P
> Shows the visual depth of your display.
</P
></DD
></DL
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN971"
>The <SPAN
CLASS="GUILABEL"
>Extended</SPAN
> Tab</A
></H2
><P
> Shows you the current pixel value while you move the pointer
over the image without pressing any buttons. In effect, it is
a color picker that does not affect the current color, but
instead gives you the pixel value regardless of the current
tool or color. For information on how to interpret the pixel
value, see the <A
HREF="../tools/color_picker.html"
> Color Picker</A
> tool.
</P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN976"
>Additional Information</A
></H2
><P
> Default Keyboard Shortcut: <B
CLASS="KEYCAP"
>Ctrl</B
>-<B
CLASS="KEYCAP"
>Shift</B
>-<B
CLASS="KEYCAP"
>I</B
>
</P
></DIV
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../image/view/dot_for_dot.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../contents.html"
>Home</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../dialogs/navigation_window.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
>Dot for Dot</TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../image/index.html"
>Up</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
><SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Navigation Window</SPAN
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
></DIV
></BODY
></HTML
>

182
help/C/dialogs/input_devices.html
View File

@ -1,35 +1,147 @@
<!doctype html public "-//w3c//dtd html 4.0 transitional//en">
<HTML>
<HEAD>
<META HTTP-EQUIV="Content-Type" CONTENT="text/html; charset=iso-8859-1">
<TITLE>Input Devices</TITLE>
</HEAD>
<BODY text="#000000" bgcolor="#FFFFFF" link="#0000FF" vlink="#FF0000" alink="#000088">
<TABLE width="100%" cellspacing="1" cellpadding="1">
<TR bgcolor="black">
<TD width="100%" align="center"><FONT size="+2" color="white">The Input Device
Dialog</FONT></TD>
</TR>
<TR bgcolor="white" >
<TD width="100%" align="left"><P>
<H4>
UNIX and Linux
</H4>
<P>
The Input device dialog will only appear in the described form if you have
Xinput enabled and are using it to support e.g a drawing tablet.
If you don't have an alternative input device, or your device is set up
incorrectly, you will get the message "No input devices".
<P>
TODO describe the device dialog
<H4>
Microsoft Windows
</H4>
<P>
Still TODO
<P>
<A href="index.html">Index</A>
</TD>
</TR>
</TABLE>
</BODY></HTML>
<HTML
><HEAD
><TITLE
>Input Devices</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.49"><LINK
REL="HOME"
TITLE="GIMP User Manual"
HREF="../contents.html"><LINK
REL="UP"
TITLE="Dialogs"
HREF="../dialogs/index.html"><LINK
REL="PREVIOUS"
TITLE=" Indexed Palette "
HREF="../dialogs/indexed_palette.html"><LINK
REL="NEXT"
TITLE="The Device Status Dialog"
HREF="../dialogs/device_status.html"></HEAD
><BODY
CLASS="SECT1"
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
TEXT="#000000"
><DIV
CLASS="NAVHEADER"
><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TH
COLSPAN="3"
ALIGN="center"
>GIMP User Manual</TH
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../dialogs/indexed_palette.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="80%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="bottom"
>Chapter 12. Dialogs</TD
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../dialogs/device_status.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="DIALOGS-INPUT-DEVICES"
>Input Devices</A
></H1
><A
NAME="AEN2727"
></A
><P
> The Input Devices dialog will only appear in the described form if you have
Xinput enabled and are using it to support e.g a drawing tablet.
If you don't have an alternative input device, or your device is set up
incorrectly, you will get the message "No input devices".
</P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../dialogs/indexed_palette.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../contents.html"
>Home</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../dialogs/device_status.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
><SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Indexed Palette</SPAN
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../dialogs/index.html"
>Up</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
>The <SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Device Status</SPAN
> Dialog</TD
></TR
></TABLE
></DIV
></BODY
></HTML
>

13
help/C/dialogs/layers/Makefile.am
View File

@ -3,13 +3,12 @@
helpdatadir = $(gimpdatadir)/help/C/dialogs/layers
helpdata_DATA = \
add_mask.html \
edit_layer_attributes.html \
index.html \
layers.html \
layer_boundary_size.html \
merge_visible_layers.html \
new_layer.html \
add_layer_mask.html \
edit_layer_attributes.html \
layers.html \
layer_boundary_size.html \
merge_visible_layers.html \
new_layer.html \
scale_layer.html
EXTRA_DIST = $(helpdata_DATA)

163
help/C/dialogs/layers/add_layer_mask.html Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,163 @@
<HTML
><HEAD
><TITLE
>Add Layer Mask</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.49"><LINK
REL="HOME"
TITLE="GIMP User Manual"
HREF="../../contents.html"><LINK
REL="UP"
TITLE="Layers"
HREF="../../layers/index.html"><LINK
REL="PREVIOUS"
TITLE="Flatten Image"
HREF="../../layers/flatten_image.html"><LINK
REL="NEXT"
TITLE="Apply Layer Mask"
HREF="../../layers/apply_mask.html"></HEAD
><BODY
CLASS="SECT1"
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
TEXT="#000000"
><DIV
CLASS="NAVHEADER"
><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TH
COLSPAN="3"
ALIGN="center"
>GIMP User Manual</TH
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../../layers/flatten_image.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="80%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="bottom"
>Chapter 5. Layers</TD
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../../layers/apply_mask.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="DIALOGS-LAYERS-ADD-LAYER-MASK"
>Add Layer Mask</A
></H1
><A
NAME="AEN1406"
></A
><P
> Will add a layer mask to the currently active layer. A layer mask
is a way to control transparency of the current layer . The mask
it self is a grayscale "image" where black pixels will make the
layer totally transparent and white pixels will make it opaque.
</P
><P
> The fill dialog enables you to choose the initial fill of the
layer mask. Black which will make the layer totally transparent,
white which will make the layer totally opace or the alpha channel
of the layer. When you choose the alpha channel the transparency
of each pixels will be mapped to a grayscale value in the mask. If
you want to further manipulate the transparency in a layer this
can be a very good option (e.g maybe you have softly erased some
parts of the image and want to continue to manipulate the
transparency).
</P
><P
> To work with the layer mask you have to active it, you do that by
clicking on the thumbnail image of the mask. However you will not
see the mask you will just see the result of your mask
operations. To see the mask you have to &lt;ZZZZ&gt; click on the
thumbnail. If you want to see you layer without the mask you have
to &lt;ZZZZ&gt; click on the thumbnail. Remember to to click one
again with the same modification key to exit the current "preview"
state. Sorry, but the help page for "Add Layer Mask" is not
written yet.
</P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../../layers/flatten_image.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../../contents.html"
>Home</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../../layers/apply_mask.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
>Flatten Image</TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../../layers/index.html"
>Up</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
>Apply Layer Mask</TD
></TR
></TABLE
></DIV
></BODY
></HTML
>

41
help/C/dialogs/layers/add_mask.html
View File

@ -1,41 +0,0 @@
<!doctype html public "-//w3c//dtd html 4.0 transitional//en">
<HTML>
<HEAD>
<META HTTP-EQUIV="Content-Type" CONTENT="text/html; charset=iso-8859-1">
<TITLE>Add Layer Mask</TITLE>
</HEAD>
<BODY text="#000000" bgcolor="#FFFFFF" link="#0000FF" vlink="#FF0000" alink="#000088">
<TABLE width="100%" cellspacing="1" cellpadding="1">
<TR bgcolor="black">
<TD width="100%" align="center"><FONT size="+2" color="white">Add Layer
Mask</FONT></TD>
</TR>
<TR bgcolor="white" >
<TD width="100%" align="left"><P>
<P>
Will add a layer mask to the currently active layer. A layer mask is a way
to control transparency of the current layer . The mask it self is a grayscale
"image" where black pixels will make the layer totally transparent and white
pixels will make it opaque.
<P>
The fill dialog enables you to choose the initial fill of the layer mask.
Black which will make the layer totally transparent, white which will make
the layer totally opace or the alpha channel of the layer. When you choose
the alpha channel the transparency of each pixels will be mapped to a grayscale
value in the mask. If you want to further manipulate the transparency in
a layer this can be a very good option (e.g maybe you have softly erased
some parts of the image and want to continue to manipulate the transparency).
<P>
To work with the layer mask you have to active it, you do that by clicking
on the thumbnail image of the mask. However you will not see the mask you
will just see the result of your mask operations. To see the mask you have
to &lt;ZZZZ&gt; click on the thumbnail. If you want to see you layer without
the mask you have to &lt;ZZZZ&gt; click on the thumbnail. Remember
to to click one again with the same modification key to exit the current
"preview" state.
<P>
<A href="index.html">Index</A>
</TD>
</TR>
</TABLE>
</BODY></HTML>

228
help/C/dialogs/layers/edit_layer_attributes.html
View File

@ -1,39 +1,189 @@
<!doctype html public "-//w3c//dtd html 4.0 transitional//en">
<HTML>
<HEAD>
<META HTTP-EQUIV="Content-Type" CONTENT="text/html; charset=iso-8859-1">
<TITLE>Edit Layer Attributes</TITLE>
</HEAD>
<BODY text="#000000" bgcolor="#FFFFFF" link="#0000FF" vlink="#FF0000" alink="#000088">
<TABLE width="100%" cellspacing="1" cellpadding="1">
<TR bgcolor="black">
<TD width="100%" align="center"><FONT size="+2" color="white">Edit Layer
Attributes</FONT></TD>
</TR>
<TR bgcolor="white" >
<TD width="100%" align="left"><P>
<P>
Lets you specify the name of the current layer. The name can also hold important
information about how to interpret a possible animation of the layers (e.g
if you save the image as a GIF you can set options about how to play the
animated GIF).
<H4>
Animation Attributes
</H4>
<P>
The animation attributes is specified as follows. "<CODE>Layer_Name (delay
in ms) (combination_mode)</CODE>" e.g <CODE>Frame_1 (100ms) (replace)</CODE>.
<P>
The delay will specify the time each frame is visible in the animation. A
delay of e.g a hundred milliseconds will have the following format
<CODE>(100ms)</CODE>.
<P>
The combination mode will specify if you will combine with the previous layer
or replace it. The two modes are either <CODE>(combine)</CODE> or
<CODE>(replace)</CODE>.
<P>
<A href="index.html">Index</A>
</TD>
</TR>
</TABLE>
</BODY></HTML>
<HTML
><HEAD
><TITLE
>Edit Layer Attributes</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.49"><LINK
REL="HOME"
TITLE="GIMP User Manual"
HREF="../../contents.html"><LINK
REL="UP"
TITLE="Layers"
HREF="../../layers/index.html"><LINK
REL="PREVIOUS"
TITLE="Aplha to Selection"
HREF="../../layers/alpha_to_selection.html"><LINK
REL="NEXT"
TITLE="Channels"
HREF="../../channels/index.html"></HEAD
><BODY
CLASS="SECT1"
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
TEXT="#000000"
><DIV
CLASS="NAVHEADER"
><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TH
COLSPAN="3"
ALIGN="center"
>GIMP User Manual</TH
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../../layers/alpha_to_selection.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="80%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="bottom"
>Chapter 5. Layers</TD
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../../channels/index.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="DIALOGS-LAYERS-EDIT-LAYER-ATTRIBUTES"
>Edit Layer Attributes</A
></H1
><A
NAME="AEN1430"
></A
><DIV
CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN1432"
>General</A
></H2
><P
> Lets you specify the name of the current layer. The name can
also hold important information about how to interpret a
possible animation of the layers (e.g if you save the image as a
GIF you can set options about how to play the animated GIF).
</P
><DIV
CLASS="SECT3"
><H3
CLASS="SECT3"
><A
NAME="AEN1435"
>Animation Attributes</A
></H3
><P
> The animation attributes is specified as follows.
<TT
CLASS="LITERAL"
>Layer_Name (delay in ms) (combination_mode)</TT
>
e.g <TT
CLASS="LITERAL"
>Frame_1 (100ms) (replace)</TT
>
</P
><P
> The delay will specify the time each frame is visible in the
animation. A delay of e.g a hundred milliseconds will have the
following format <TT
CLASS="LITERAL"
>(100ms)</TT
>.
</P
><P
> The combination mode will specify if you will combine with the
previous layer or replace it. The two modes are either
<TT
CLASS="LITERAL"
>(combine)</TT
> or <TT
CLASS="LITERAL"
>(replace)</TT
>.
</P
></DIV
></DIV
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../../layers/alpha_to_selection.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../../contents.html"
>Home</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../../channels/index.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
>Aplha to Selection</TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../../layers/index.html"
>Up</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
>Channels</TD
></TR
></TABLE
></DIV
></BODY
></HTML
>

38
help/C/dialogs/layers/index.html
View File

@ -1,38 +0,0 @@
<!doctype html public "-//w3c//dtd html 4.0 transitional//en">
<html>
<head>
<META HTTP-EQUIV="Content-Type" CONTENT="text/html; charset=iso-8859-1">
<title>Index for layers</title>
</head>
<body text="#000000" bgcolor="#FFFFFF" link="#0000FF"
vlink="#FF0000" alink="#000088">
<table width="100%" cellspacing="1" cellpadding="1">
<tr bgcolor="black">
<td width="100%" align="center">
<font size="+2" color="white">layers Index</font>
</td>
</tr>
<tr bgcolor="white" >
<td width="100%" align="left">
<p>
(/dialogs/layers/index.html)<p>
<a href="../index.html">Top index</a><p>
<p>Topics in this directory:<p>
<a href="add_mask.html">add_mask</a><br>
<a href="edit_layer_attributes.html">edit_layer_attributes</a><br>
<a href="layer_boundary_size.html">layer_boundary_size</a><br>
<a href="layers.html">layers</a><br>
<a href="merge_visible_layers.html">merge_visible_layers</a><br>
<a href="new_layer.html">new_layer</a><br>
<a href="scale_layer.html">scale_layer</a><br>
<p>
/Karin & Olof
<p>
</td>
</tr>
</table>
</body>
</html>

268
help/C/dialogs/layers/layer_boundary_size.html
View File

@ -1,58 +1,210 @@
<!doctype html public "-//w3c//dtd html 4.0 transitional//en">
<HTML>
<HEAD>
<META HTTP-EQUIV="Content-Type" CONTENT="text/html; charset=iso-8859-1">
<TITLE>Layer Boundary Size</TITLE>
</HEAD>
<BODY text="#000000" bgcolor="#FFFFFF" link="#0000FF" vlink="#FF0000" alink="#000088">
<TABLE width="100%" cellspacing="1" cellpadding="1">
<TR bgcolor="black">
<TD width="100%" align="center"><FONT size="+2" color="white">Layer Boundary
Size</FONT></TD>
</TR>
<TR bgcolor="white" >
<TD width="100%" align="left"><P>
<P>
The Layer Boundary Size lets you set the the boundary of the layer. Remember
you can have a smaller or larger layer than the image boundary size. When
you enlarge the boundary size, then you will add some space to paint on to
your layer. Naturally it will be wise versa when you make the boundary size
it smaller.
<P>
The size area will control how big or small your new layer boundary will
be just as when you created a new layer. The Offset area will control how
your layer is clipped or expanded.
<P>
<DL>
<DT>
<EM>Making the layer smaller:</EM>
<DD>
The offset fields will control where your upper left corner of the old layer
will be in the "new" layer. The best way to control the new location and
how and where the layer will be clipped. Is to drag the "layer preview" in
the Offset area to the right position, and&nbsp;make the final touch with
the spin buttons (or type it in by hand). The thin outline is the new layer
size and you have to drag the old layer to the right position so it will
be clipped according to your demands.
<DT>
<EM>Making the layer bigger:</EM>
<DD>
The offset fields will control where your upper left corner of the old layer
will be in the "new" layer. The best way to control the new location and
how and where the layer will be clipped. Is to drag the "layer preview" in
the Offset area to the right position, and&nbsp;make the final touch with
the spin buttons (or type it in by hand). The outline/canvas &nbsp;is the
new layer size and you have to drag the old layer to the right position within
it.
</DL>
<P>
If you uncheck the chain in the Size area, you will be able to have different
ratios when you make the "new" layer . It's therefore possible e.g to have
a layer which is smaller in X direction and bigger in Y direction than before
you altered the layer boundary size.
<P>
<A href="index.html">Index</A>
</TD>
</TR>
</TABLE>
</BODY></HTML>
<HTML
><HEAD
><TITLE
>Layer Boundary Size</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.49"><LINK
REL="HOME"
TITLE="GIMP User Manual"
HREF="../../contents.html"><LINK
REL="UP"
TITLE="Layers"
HREF="../../layers/index.html"><LINK
REL="PREVIOUS"
TITLE="Delete Layer"
HREF="../../layers/delete_layer.html"><LINK
REL="NEXT"
TITLE="Layer to Image Size"
HREF="../../layers/layer_to_image_size.html"></HEAD
><BODY
CLASS="SECT1"
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
TEXT="#000000"
><DIV
CLASS="NAVHEADER"
><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TH
COLSPAN="3"
ALIGN="center"
>GIMP User Manual</TH
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../../layers/delete_layer.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="80%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="bottom"
>Chapter 5. Layers</TD
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../../layers/layer_to_image_size.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="DIALOGS-LAYERS-LAYER-BOUNDARY-SIZE"
>Layer Boundary Size</A
></H1
><A
NAME="AEN1349"
></A
><DIV
CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN1351"
>General</A
></H2
><P
> The Layer Boundary Size lets you set the the boundary of the
layer. Remember you can have a smaller or larger layer than the
image boundary size. When you enlarge the boundary size, then
you will add some space to paint on to your layer. Naturally it
will be wise versa when you make the boundary size it smaller.
</P
><P
> The size area will control how big or small your new layer
boundary will be just as when you created a new layer. The
Offset area will control how your layer is clipped or expanded.
</P
><DIV
CLASS="SECT3"
><H3
CLASS="SECT3"
><A
NAME="AEN1355"
>Making the layer smaller</A
></H3
><P
> The offset fields will control where your upper left corner of
the old layer will be in the "new" layer. The best way to
control the new location and how and where the layer will be
clipped. Is to drag the "layer preview" in the Offset area to
the right position, and&nbsp;make the final touch with the
spin buttons (or type it in by hand). The thin outline is the
new layer size and you have to drag the old layer to the right
position so it will be clipped according to your demands.
</P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="SECT3"
><H3
CLASS="SECT3"
><A
NAME="AEN1358"
>Making the layer bigger</A
></H3
><P
> The offset fields will control where your upper left corner of
the old layer will be in the "new" layer. The best way to
control the new location and how and where the layer will be
clipped. Is to drag the "layer preview" in the Offset area to
the right position, and&nbsp;make the final touch with the
spin buttons (or type it in by hand). The outline/canvas
&nbsp;is the new layer size and you have to drag the old layer
to the right position within it.
</P
></DIV
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN1361"
>The chain button</A
></H2
><P
> If you uncheck the chain in the Size area, you will be able to
have different ratios when you make the "new" layer . It's
therefore possible e.g to have a layer which is smaller in X
direction and bigger in Y direction than before you altered the
layer boundary size.
</P
></DIV
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../../layers/delete_layer.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../../contents.html"
>Home</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../../layers/layer_to_image_size.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
>Delete Layer</TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../../layers/index.html"
>Up</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
>Layer to Image Size</TD
></TR
></TABLE
></DIV
></BODY
></HTML
>

255
help/C/dialogs/layers/layers.html
View File

@ -1,53 +1,202 @@
<!doctype html public "-//w3c//dtd html 4.0 transitional//en">
<HTML>
<HEAD>
<META HTTP-EQUIV="Content-Type" CONTENT="text/html; charset=iso-8859-1">
<TITLE>The Layer Dialog</TITLE>
</HEAD>
<BODY text="#000000" bgcolor="#FFFFFF" link="#0000FF" vlink="#FF0000" alink="#000088">
<TABLE width="100%" cellspacing="1" cellpadding="1">
<TR bgcolor="black">
<TD width="100%" align="center"><FONT size="+2" color="white">The Layers
Dialog</FONT></TD>
</TR>
<TR bgcolor="white" >
<TD width="100%" align="left"><P>
<P>
The Layer(s) dialog is the main interface to interact with layers present
in a Gimp image. You can think of layers as a stack of slides or clothes
on your body. Gimp gives you several methods of combining layers with help
of <A HREF="../../modes.html">modes</A>. The mode of a layer will determine
how it will interact with other layers present in the image.
<P>
Before you can do anything with a layer the layer must be activated (if you
only have one layer that layer is always active). You do so by clicking on
the layer name, if you double click on the name you will be able to set the
<A HREF="edit_layer_attributes.html">layer attributes</A> of that layer.
<P>
If you right click on the layer name you will be able to access the layer
menu, with in the layer menu you have access to several other layer commands,
see <A HREF="../../layers/index.html">Index</A>.
<P>
With the Opacity slider will you control the over general transparency of
the currently active layer. The Keep Trans check button controls what ever
you can or can't paint on transparent areas of the layer. If it is checked
then you can paint on transparent areas of the layer (i.e you can only paint
on opaque areas).
<P>
In the button row you have six layer command buttons,
<A HREF="new_layer.html">New Layer</A>,
<A HREF="../../layers/stack/stack.html">Raise Layer</A>,
<A HREF="../../layers/stack/stack.html">Lower Layer</A>,
<A HREF="../../layers/duplicate_layer.html">Duplicate Layer</A>,
<A HREF="../../layers/anchor_layer.html">Anchor Layer</A> and
<A HREF="../../layers/delete_layer.html">Delete Layer</A>.
<P>
Gimp's Layer dialog is by default Auto switched, it will always show the
image that you are working with. You can however switch this off and choose
another image to work with in the drop down menu.
<P>
<A href="index.html">Index</A>
</TD>
</TR>
</TABLE>
</BODY></HTML>
<HTML
><HEAD
><TITLE
>Layers Dialog</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.49"><LINK
REL="HOME"
TITLE="GIMP User Manual"
HREF="../../contents.html"><LINK
REL="UP"
TITLE="Layers"
HREF="../../layers/index.html"><LINK
REL="PREVIOUS"
TITLE="Using Layers"
HREF="../../layers/using_layers.html"><LINK
REL="NEXT"
TITLE="New Layer"
HREF="../../dialogs/layers/new_layer.html"></HEAD
><BODY
CLASS="SECT1"
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
TEXT="#000000"
><DIV
CLASS="NAVHEADER"
><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TH
COLSPAN="3"
ALIGN="center"
>GIMP User Manual</TH
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../../layers/using_layers.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="80%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="bottom"
>Chapter 5. Layers</TD
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../../dialogs/layers/new_layer.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="DIALOGS-LAYERS-LAYERS"
>Layers Dialog</A
></H1
><A
NAME="AEN1285"
></A
><P
> The Layers dialog is the main interface to interact with layers
present in a Gimp image. You can think of layers as a stack of
slides or clothes on your body. Gimp gives you several methods of
combining layers with help of modes. The mode of a layer will
determine how it will interact with other layers present in the
image.
</P
><P
> Before you can do anything with a layer the layer must be
activated (if you only have one layer that layer is always
active). You do so by clicking on the layer name, if you double
click on the name you will be able to <A
HREF="../../dialogs/layers/edit_layer_attributes.html"
> set the layer
attributes </A
> of that layer.
</P
><P
> If you right click on the layer name you will be able to access
the layer menu, with in the layer menu you have access to several
other layer commands, see <A
HREF="../../layers/index.html"
>Chapter 5</A
>.
</P
><P
> With the Opacity slider will you control the over general
transparency of the currently active layer. The Keep Trans check
button controls what ever you can or can't paint on transparent
areas of the layer. If it is checked then you can paint on
transparent areas of the layer (i.e you can only paint on opaque
areas).
</P
><P
> In the button row you have six layer command buttons,
<A
HREF="../../dialogs/layers/new_layer.html"
>New Layer</A
>,
<A
HREF="../../layers/stack/stack.html"
>Raise Layer</A
>,
<A
HREF="../../layers/stack/stack.html"
>Lower Layer</A
>,
<A
HREF="../../layers/duplicate_layer.html"
>Duplicate Layer</A
>,
<A
HREF="../../layers/anchor_layer.html"
>Anchor Layer</A
> and
<A
HREF="../../layers/delete_layer.html"
>Delete Layer</A
>.
</P
><P
> Gimp's Layers dialog is by default Auto switched, it will always
show the image that you are working with. You can however switch
this off and choose another image to work with in the drop down
menu.
</P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../../layers/using_layers.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../../contents.html"
>Home</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../../dialogs/layers/new_layer.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
>Using Layers</TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../../layers/index.html"
>Up</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
>New Layer</TD
></TR
></TABLE
></DIV
></BODY
></HTML
>

237
help/C/dialogs/layers/merge_visible_layers.html
View File

@ -1,44 +1,193 @@
<!doctype html public "-//w3c//dtd html 4.0 transitional//en">
<HTML>
<HEAD>
<META HTTP-EQUIV="Content-Type" CONTENT="text/html; charset=iso-8859-1">
<TITLE>Merge Visible Layers</TITLE>
</HEAD>
<BODY text="#000000" bgcolor="#FFFFFF" link="#0000FF" vlink="#FF0000" alink="#000088">
<TABLE width="100%" cellspacing="1" cellpadding="1">
<TR bgcolor="black">
<TD width="100%" align="center"><FONT size="+2" color="white">Merge Visible
Layers</FONT></TD>
</TR>
<TR bgcolor="white" >
<TD width="100%" align="left"><P>
<P>
Merge Visible Layers will combine currently visible layers to one layer,
invisible layers aren't effected and will stay as before the merge. There
are three ways to merge visible layers.
<P>
<DL>
<DT>
<EM>Expanded as necessary:</EM>
<DD>
The final layer has the size of the biggest layer of all of the visible layers.
(Remember that a layer in Gimp can be bigger than the image)
<DT>
<EM>Clipped to image:</EM>
<DD>
Will set the final layer size equal to the image size. (Remember that layers
in Gimp can be bigger than the image it self. If you have such a visible
layer it will be clipped to the image size).
<DT>
<EM>Clipped to bottom layer:</EM>
<DD>
Will set the final layer size equal to the bottom layer. If the bottom layer
is smaller than any of your visible layers. The final layer will be clipped
and trimmed according to both the size and position of the bottom layer.
</DL>
<P>
<A href="index.html">Index</A>
</TD>
</TR>
</TABLE>
</BODY></HTML>
<HTML
><HEAD
><TITLE
>Merge Visible Layers</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.49"><LINK
REL="HOME"
TITLE="GIMP User Manual"
HREF="../../contents.html"><LINK
REL="UP"
TITLE="Layers"
HREF="../../layers/index.html"><LINK
REL="PREVIOUS"
TITLE="Scale Layer"
HREF="../../dialogs/layers/scale_layer.html"><LINK
REL="NEXT"
TITLE="Merge Down"
HREF="../../layers/merge_down.html"></HEAD
><BODY
CLASS="SECT1"
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
TEXT="#000000"
><DIV
CLASS="NAVHEADER"
><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TH
COLSPAN="3"
ALIGN="center"
>GIMP User Manual</TH
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../../dialogs/layers/scale_layer.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="80%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="bottom"
>Chapter 5. Layers</TD
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../../layers/merge_down.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="DIALOGS-LAYERS-MERGE-VISIBLE-LAYERS"
>Merge Visible Layers</A
></H1
><A
NAME="AEN1381"
></A
><DIV
CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN1383"
>General</A
></H2
><P
> Merge Visible Layers will combine currently visible layers to
one layer, invisible layers aren't effected and will stay as
before the merge. There are three ways to merge visible layers.
</P
><DIV
CLASS="SECT3"
><H3
CLASS="SECT3"
><A
NAME="AEN1386"
>Expanded as necessary</A
></H3
><P
> The final layer has the size of the biggest layer of all of
the visible layers. (Remember that a layer in Gimp can be
bigger than the image)
</P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="SECT3"
><H3
CLASS="SECT3"
><A
NAME="AEN1389"
>Clipped to image</A
></H3
><P
> Will set the final layer size equal to the image
size. (Remember that layers in Gimp can be bigger than the
image it self. If you have such a visible layer it will be
clipped to the image size).
</P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="SECT3"
><H3
CLASS="SECT3"
><A
NAME="AEN1392"
>Clipped to bottom layer</A
></H3
><P
> Will set the final layer size equal to the bottom layer. If
the bottom layer is smaller than any of your visible
layers. The final layer will be clipped and trimmed according
to both the size and position of the bottom layer.
</P
></DIV
></DIV
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../../dialogs/layers/scale_layer.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../../contents.html"
>Home</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../../layers/merge_down.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
>Scale Layer</TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../../layers/index.html"
>Up</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
>Merge Down</TD
></TR
></TABLE
></DIV
></BODY
></HTML
>

192
help/C/dialogs/layers/new_layer.html
View File

@ -1,32 +1,160 @@
<!doctype html public "-//w3c//dtd html 4.0 transitional//en">
<HTML>
<HEAD>
<META HTTP-EQUIV="Content-Type" CONTENT="text/html; charset=iso-8859-1">
<TITLE>New Layer</TITLE>
</HEAD>
<BODY text="#000000" bgcolor="#FFFFFF" link="#0000FF" vlink="#FF0000" alink="#000088">
<TABLE width="100%" cellspacing="1" cellpadding="1">
<TR bgcolor="black">
<TD width="100%" align="center"><FONT size="+2" color="white">New Layer</FONT></TD>
</TR>
<TR bgcolor="white" >
<TD width="100%" align="left"><P>
<P>
Will create a new layer. &nbsp;You can set the new layers attributes in the
Layer Name field please see <A HREF="edit_layer_attributes.html">Edit Layer
Attributes</A> for an explanation of layer attributes. Just as in
<A HREF="../file_new.html">New Image</A> can you also set the Fill Type to
either the Foreground or Background color of the tool box, White or totally
Transparent.
<P>
The size of the layer can be set in a number of different ways and units.
A new unit is the % unit which will create a new layer that is X% of the
bottom layer. Default is to measure the new layer in pixels which is the
best if you are dealing with web graphics, but if you going to print your
image then real world units such as inches is probably the preferred.
<P>
<A href="index.html">Index</A>
</TD>
</TR>
</TABLE>
</BODY></HTML>
<HTML
><HEAD
><TITLE
>New Layer</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.49"><LINK
REL="HOME"
TITLE="GIMP User Manual"
HREF="../../contents.html"><LINK
REL="UP"
TITLE="Layers"
HREF="../../layers/index.html"><LINK
REL="PREVIOUS"
TITLE="Layers Dialog"
HREF="../../dialogs/layers/layers.html"><LINK
REL="NEXT"
TITLE="Stack"
HREF="../../layers/stack/stack.html"></HEAD
><BODY
CLASS="SECT1"
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
TEXT="#000000"
><DIV
CLASS="NAVHEADER"
><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TH
COLSPAN="3"
ALIGN="center"
>GIMP User Manual</TH
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../../dialogs/layers/layers.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="80%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="bottom"
>Chapter 5. Layers</TD
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../../layers/stack/stack.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="DIALOGS-LAYERS-NEW-LAYER"
>New Layer</A
></H1
><A
NAME="AEN1303"
></A
><P
> Will create a new layer. You can set the new layers attributes in
the <SPAN
CLASS="GUILABEL"
>Layer Name</SPAN
> field please see <A
HREF="../../dialogs/layers/edit_layer_attributes.html"
>Edit Layer
Attributes</A
> for an explanation of layer attributes. Just as
in <A
HREF="../../dialogs/file_new.html"
>New Image</A
> can you also
set the Fill Type to either the Foreground or Background color of
the tool box, White or totally Transparent.
</P
><P
> The size of the layer can be set in a number of different ways and
units. A new unit is the % unit which will create a new layer
that is X% of the bottom layer. Default is to measure the new
layer in pixels which is the best if you are dealing with web
graphics, but if you going to print your image then real world
units such as inches is probably the preferred.
</P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../../dialogs/layers/layers.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../../contents.html"
>Home</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../../layers/stack/stack.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
>Layers Dialog</TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../../layers/index.html"
>Up</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
>Stack</TD
></TR
></TABLE
></DIV
></BODY
></HTML
>

213
help/C/dialogs/layers/scale_layer.html
View File

@ -1,32 +1,183 @@
<!doctype html public "-//w3c//dtd html 4.0 transitional//en">
<HTML>
<HEAD>
<META HTTP-EQUIV="Content-Type" CONTENT="text/html; charset=iso-8859-1">
<TITLE>Scale Layer</TITLE>
</HEAD>
<BODY text="#000000" bgcolor="#FFFFFF" link="#0000FF" vlink="#FF0000" alink="#000088">
<TABLE width="100%" cellspacing="1" cellpadding="1">
<TR bgcolor="black">
<TD width="100%" align="center"><FONT size="+2" color="white">Scale
Layer</FONT></TD>
</TR>
<TR bgcolor="white" >
<TD width="100%" align="left"><P>
<P>
Will scale the layer content, &nbsp;and also make the layer boundary either
size smaller or bigger. The difference between Scale Layer and Set Layer
Boundary Size is that <A HREF="resize_layer.html">Set Layer Boundary Size</A>
will enable you to have a smaller or bigger layer without scaling the layer
content (i.e it will only add some space to on around the layer or clip the
layer). NOTE: Scale layer will only scale the currently active layer, scale
<HTML
><HEAD
><TITLE
>Scale Layer</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.49"><LINK
REL="HOME"
TITLE="GIMP User Manual"
HREF="../../contents.html"><LINK
REL="UP"
TITLE="Layers"
HREF="../../layers/index.html"><LINK
REL="PREVIOUS"
TITLE="Layer to Image Size"
HREF="../../layers/layer_to_image_size.html"><LINK
REL="NEXT"
TITLE="Merge Visible Layers"
HREF="../../dialogs/layers/merge_visible_layers.html"></HEAD
><BODY
CLASS="SECT1"
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
TEXT="#000000"
><DIV
CLASS="NAVHEADER"
><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TH
COLSPAN="3"
ALIGN="center"
>GIMP User Manual</TH
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../../layers/layer_to_image_size.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="80%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="bottom"
>Chapter 5. Layers</TD
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../../dialogs/layers/merge_visible_layers.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="DIALOGS-LAYERS-SCALE-LAYER"
>Scale Layer</A
></H1
><A
NAME="AEN1371"
></A
><P
> Will scale the layer content, &nbsp;and also make the layer
boundary either size smaller or bigger. The difference between
Scale Layer and <A
HREF="../../dialogs/layers/layer_boundary_size.html"
>Set Layer Boundary
Size</A
> is that "Set Layer Boundary Size" will enable you to
have a smaller or bigger layer without scaling the layer content
(i.e it will only add some space to on around the layer or clip
the layer).
</P
><DIV
CLASS="NOTE"
><P
></P
><TABLE
CLASS="NOTE"
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="25"
ALIGN="CENTER"
VALIGN="TOP"
><IMG
SRC="../../../images/note.gif"
HSPACE="5"
ALT="Note"></TD
><TD
ALIGN="LEFT"
VALIGN="TOP"
><P
> Scale layer will only scale the currently active layer, scale
image will scale all layers with in the image.
<P>
You will set the new layer size either by altering the size or ratio. You
have have exactly the same options as in create <A HREF="new_layer.html">new
layer</A>.
<P>
<A href="index.html">Index</A>
</TD>
</TR>
</TABLE>
</BODY></HTML>
</P
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
></DIV
><P
> You will set the new layer size either by altering the size or
ratio. You have have exactly the same options as in
<A
HREF="../../dialogs/layers/new_layer.html"
>New Layer</A
>.
</P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../../layers/layer_to_image_size.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../../contents.html"
>Home</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../../dialogs/layers/merge_visible_layers.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
>Layer to Image Size</TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../../layers/index.html"
>Up</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
>Merge Visible Layers</TD
></TR
></TABLE
></DIV
></BODY
></HTML
>

243
help/C/dialogs/layers_and_channels.html
View File

@ -1,35 +1,208 @@
<!doctype html public "-//w3c//dtd html 4.0 transitional//en">
<HTML>
<HEAD>
<META HTTP-EQUIV="Content-Type" CONTENT="text/html; charset=iso-8859-1">
<TITLE>Layers, Channels and Path Dialog</TITLE>
</HEAD>
<BODY text="#000000" bgcolor="#FFFFFF" link="#0000FF" vlink="#FF0000" alink="#000088">
<TABLE width="100%" cellspacing="1" cellpadding="1">
<TR bgcolor="black">
<TD width="100%" align="center"><FONT size="+2" color="white">Layers, Channels
and Paths Dialog</FONT></TD>
</TR>
<TR bgcolor="white" >
<TD width="100%" align="left"><P>
<P>
The Layers, Channels and Paths dialog is an "auto switching
dialog," which means that
the currently active image is is the one present in the tab
folders of the dialog. You can turn off Auto and choose another
opened image in the Image drop down menu.
<P>
Please see each tab's help page for help about
<A HREF="layers/layers.html">Layers</A>,
<A HREF="channels/channels.html">Channels</A> and
<A HREF="paths/paths.html">Paths</A>.
<H3>
Additional Information
</H3>
Default Keyboard Shortcut: Ctrl+L
<P>
<A href="index.html">Index</A>
</TD>
</TR>
</TABLE>
</BODY></HTML>
<HTML
><HEAD
><TITLE
>Layers, Channels and Paths Dialog</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.49"><LINK
REL="HOME"
TITLE="GIMP User Manual"
HREF="../contents.html"><LINK
REL="UP"
TITLE="Dialogs"
HREF="../dialogs/index.html"><LINK
REL="PREVIOUS"
TITLE="Dialogs"
HREF="../dialogs/index.html"><LINK
REL="NEXT"
TITLE="The Preferences Dialog"
HREF="../dialogs/preferences/preferences.html"></HEAD
><BODY
CLASS="SECT1"
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
TEXT="#000000"
><DIV
CLASS="NAVHEADER"
><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TH
COLSPAN="3"
ALIGN="center"
>GIMP User Manual</TH
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../dialogs/index.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="80%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="bottom"
>Chapter 12. Dialogs</TD
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../dialogs/preferences/preferences.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="DIALOGS-LAYERS-AND-CHANNELS"
><SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Layers, Channels and Paths</SPAN
> Dialog</A
></H1
><A
NAME="AEN2160"
></A
><P
> The <SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Layers, Channels and Paths</SPAN
> dialog is an
<SPAN
CLASS="QUOTE"
>"auto switching dialog"</SPAN
>, which means that the current
image is the one shown in the tab folders of the dialog.
You can turn off <SPAN
CLASS="GUIBUTTON"
>Auto</SPAN
> and choose another
opened image in the <SPAN
CLASS="GUIMENU"
>Image</SPAN
> drop down menu.
</P
><P
> Please see each tab's help page for help about
<P
></P
><UL
><LI
><P
> <A
HREF="../layers/index.html"
>Layers</A
>
</P
></LI
><LI
><P
> <A
HREF="../channels/index.html"
>Channels</A
>
</P
></LI
><LI
><P
> <A
HREF="../paths/index.html"
>Paths</A
>.
</P
></LI
></UL
>
</P
><DIV
CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN2178"
>Additional Information</A
></H2
><P
> Default Keyboard Shortcut: <B
CLASS="KEYCAP"
>Ctrl</B
>-<B
CLASS="KEYCAP"
>L</B
>
</P
></DIV
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../dialogs/index.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../contents.html"
>Home</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../dialogs/preferences/preferences.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
>Dialogs</TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../dialogs/index.html"
>Up</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
>The Preferences Dialog</TD
></TR
></TABLE
></DIV
></BODY
></HTML
>

217
help/C/dialogs/module_browser.html
View File

@ -1,36 +1,181 @@
<!doctype html public "-//w3c//dtd html 4.0 transitional//en">
<HTML>
<HEAD>
<META HTTP-EQUIV="Content-Type" CONTENT="text/html; charset=iso-8859-1">
<TITLE>Module Browser</TITLE>
</HEAD>
<BODY text="#000000" bgcolor="#FFFFFF" link="#0000FF" vlink="#FF0000" alink="#000088">
<TABLE width="100%" cellspacing="1" cellpadding="1">
<TR bgcolor="black">
<TD width="100%" align="center"><FONT size="+2" color="white">Module
Browser</FONT></TD>
</TR>
<TR bgcolor="white" >
<TD width="100%" align="left"><P>
<P>
The module brower is an interface for currently loaded and
available modules
in GIMP, along with information about the module. Gimp 1.2 currently uses
modules only for color selectors (there is also a gamma display module).
In the module browser you can set if these modules
should be loaded at start
up (this button is non-functional at the moment and all modules will
be loaded by default).
<P>
You can also unload a module on the fly, e.g you may not want
the watercolor color selector. If you unload a module, the
functionality provided by the
module will no longer be available in your current Gimp session.
To enable the functionality again, you have to mark the module
and reload it.
<P>
<A href="index.html">Index</A>
</TD>
</TR>
</TABLE>
</BODY></HTML>
<HTML
><HEAD
><TITLE
>Module Browser</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.49"><LINK
REL="HOME"
TITLE="GIMP User Manual"
HREF="../contents.html"><LINK
REL="UP"
TITLE="ToolBox"
HREF="../toolbox/index.html"><LINK
REL="PREVIOUS"
TITLE="The ToolBox"
HREF="../toolbox/toolbox.html"><LINK
REL="NEXT"
TITLE="Help Page for Help"
HREF="../dialogs/help.html"></HEAD
><BODY
CLASS="SECT1"
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
TEXT="#000000"
><DIV
CLASS="NAVHEADER"
><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TH
COLSPAN="3"
ALIGN="center"
>GIMP User Manual</TH
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../toolbox/toolbox.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="80%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="bottom"
>Chapter 3. ToolBox</TD
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../dialogs/help.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="MODULES-BROWSER"
><SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Module Browser</SPAN
></A
></H1
><A
NAME="AEN546"
></A
><P
> The <SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>module brower</SPAN
> is an interface for
currently loaded and available modules in
<SPAN
CLASS="APPLICATION"
>GIMP</SPAN
>, along with information about the
module. The current <SPAN
CLASS="APPLICATION"
>GIMP</SPAN
> uses modules
only for color selectors (there is also a gamma display module).
In the <SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>module browser</SPAN
> you can set if these
modules should be loaded at start up (this button is
non-functional at the moment and all modules will be loaded by
default).
</P
><P
> You can also unload a module on the fly, e.g. you may not want the
<SPAN
CLASS="GUILABEL"
>watercolor color selector</SPAN
>. If you unload a
module, the functionality provided by the module will no longer be
available in your current <SPAN
CLASS="APPLICATION"
>GIMP</SPAN
>
session. To enable the functionality again, you have to mark the
module and reload it.
</P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../toolbox/toolbox.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../contents.html"
>Home</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../dialogs/help.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
>The <SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>ToolBox</SPAN
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../toolbox/index.html"
>Up</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
>Help Page for <SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Help</SPAN
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
></DIV
></BODY
></HTML
>

219
help/C/dialogs/navigation_window.html
View File

@ -1,35 +1,184 @@
<!doctype html public "-//w3c//dtd html 4.0 transitional//en">
<HTML>
<HEAD>
<META HTTP-EQUIV="Content-Type" CONTENT="text/html; charset=iso-8859-1">
<TITLE>Navigation Window</TITLE>
</HEAD>
<BODY text="#000000" bgcolor="#FFFFFF" link="#0000FF" vlink="#FF0000" alink="#000088">
<TABLE width="100%" cellspacing="1" cellpadding="1">
<TR bgcolor="black">
<TD width="100%" align="center"><FONT size="+2" color="white">Navigation
Window</FONT></TD>
</TR>
<TR bgcolor="white" >
<TD width="100%" align="left"><P>
<P>
The navigation window allows you to quickly and easily move
around the image currently being edited. The dialog shows a small
preview of the whole image. The section of the image which is viewable
in the image window (where the editing takes place) is highlighted with
a black square. The current scale factor of the image is also shown
as a ratio (2:1 is 300% zoomed in). The zoom factor can be changed
by moving the slider (left to zoom out, right to zoom in) or clicking
the magnifying glass icons. You can also drag the highlighted square to
pan the image (to change which part is viewable in the image window).
<H3>
Additional Information
</H3>
<P>
Default Keyboard Shortcut: Ctrl+Shift+N
<P>
<A href="index.html">Index</A>
</TD>
</TR>
</TABLE>
</BODY></HTML>
<HTML
><HEAD
><TITLE
> Navigation Window </TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.49"><LINK
REL="HOME"
TITLE="GIMP User Manual"
HREF="../contents.html"><LINK
REL="UP"
TITLE="Image"
HREF="../image/index.html"><LINK
REL="PREVIOUS"
TITLE="Info Window"
HREF="../dialogs/info_window.html"><LINK
REL="NEXT"
TITLE="Toggle Selection"
HREF="../image/view/toggle_selection.html"></HEAD
><BODY
CLASS="SECT1"
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
TEXT="#000000"
><DIV
CLASS="NAVHEADER"
><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TH
COLSPAN="3"
ALIGN="center"
>GIMP User Manual</TH
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../dialogs/info_window.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="80%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="bottom"
>Chapter 4. Image</TD
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../image/view/toggle_selection.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="DIALOGS-NAVIGATION-WINDOW"
><SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Navigation Window</SPAN
></A
></H1
><A
NAME="AEN986"
></A
><P
> The <SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>navigation window</SPAN
> allows you to quickly
and easily move around the image currently being edited. The
dialog shows a small preview of the whole image. The section of
the image which is visible in the image window (where the editing
takes place) is highlighted with a black square. The current scale
factor of the image is also shown as a ratio. The zoom factor can
be changed by moving the
<SPAN
CLASS="GUIBUTTON"
>slider</SPAN
> (left to zoom out, right to zoom in)
or clicking the <SPAN
CLASS="GUIICON"
>magnifying glass</SPAN
> icons. You
can also drag the highlighted square to pan the image (to change
which part is viewable in the image window).
</P
><DIV
CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN992"
>Additional Information</A
></H2
><P
> Default Keyboard Shortcut: <B
CLASS="KEYCAP"
>Ctrl</B
>-<B
CLASS="KEYCAP"
>Shift</B
>-<B
CLASS="KEYCAP"
>N</B
>
</P
></DIV
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../dialogs/info_window.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../contents.html"
>Home</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../image/view/toggle_selection.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
><SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Info Window</SPAN
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../image/index.html"
>Up</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
>Toggle Selection</TD
></TR
></TABLE
></DIV
></BODY
></HTML
>

211
help/C/dialogs/offset.html
View File

@ -1,37 +1,174 @@
<!doctype html public "-//w3c//dtd html 4.0 transitional//en">
<HTML>
<HEAD>
<META HTTP-EQUIV="Content-Type" CONTENT="text/html; charset=iso-8859-1">
<TITLE>Offset</TITLE>
</HEAD>
<BODY text="#000000" bgcolor="#FFFFFF" link="#0000FF" vlink="#FF0000" alink="#000088">
<TABLE width="100%" cellspacing="1" cellpadding="1">
<TR bgcolor="black">
<TD width="100%" align="center"><FONT size="+2" color="white">Offset</FONT></TD>
</TR>
<TR bgcolor="white" >
<TD width="100%" align="left"><P>
<P>
Offset moves the current layer or channel up, down, left, or
right by the chosen number of pixels. When pixels overrun the
dimensions of the layer, you can decide if they are wrapped or
not. Offset can be used to place layers or floating selections
to a specific position in the image.
<P>
Offset is useful if you want to move layers a very exact amount,
or if you'd like to move them without extending the layer
border. The other important
application of this command is to create seamless tiles for patterns.
<P>
If the Wrap Around button is checked, after you offset the layer
or selection, the parts of the image that moved outside the
layer border will turn up on
the other side of the image. If you don't want this, you can
choose to fill the empty area with the background color or with
transparency.
<P>
<A href="index.html">Index</A>
</TD>
</TR>
</TABLE>
</BODY></HTML>
<HTML
><HEAD
><TITLE
>Offset</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.49"><LINK
REL="HOME"
TITLE="GIMP User Manual"
HREF="../contents.html"><LINK
REL="UP"
TITLE="Image"
HREF="../image/index.html"><LINK
REL="PREVIOUS"
TITLE="Equalize"
HREF="../image/image/colors/auto/equalize.html"><LINK
REL="NEXT"
TITLE="Set Canvas Size"
HREF="../dialogs/set_canvas_size.html"></HEAD
><BODY
CLASS="SECT1"
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
TEXT="#000000"
><DIV
CLASS="NAVHEADER"
><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TH
COLSPAN="3"
ALIGN="center"
>GIMP User Manual</TH
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../image/image/colors/auto/equalize.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="80%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="bottom"
>Chapter 4. Image</TD
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../dialogs/set_canvas_size.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="OFFSET"
><SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Offset</SPAN
></A
></H1
><A
NAME="AEN1158"
></A
><P
> <SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Offset</SPAN
> moves the current layer or channel
up, down, left, or right by the chosen number of pixels. When the
edges overrun the dimensions of the layer, you can decide if they
are wrapped or not. <SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Offset</SPAN
> can be used to
place layers or floating selections at a specific position in the
image.
</P
><P
> <SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Offset</SPAN
> is useful if you want to move layers
a very exact amount or if you'd like to move them without
extending the layer border. The other important application of
this command is to create seamless tiles for patterns.
</P
><P
> If the <SPAN
CLASS="GUIBUTTON"
>Wrap Around</SPAN
>button is checked,
the parts of the image
that move outside the layer border will turn up on the other side
of the image. If you don't want this, you can choose to fill the
empty area with the background color or with transparency.
</P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../image/image/colors/auto/equalize.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../contents.html"
>Home</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../dialogs/set_canvas_size.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
>Equalize</TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../image/index.html"
>Up</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
><SPAN
CLASS="INTERFACE"
>Set Canvas Size</SPAN
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
></DIV
></BODY
></HTML
>

9
help/C/dialogs/palette_editor/Makefile.am
View File

@ -3,11 +3,10 @@
helpdatadir = $(gimpdatadir)/help/C/dialogs/palette_editor
helpdata_DATA = \
delete_palette.html \
import_palette.html \
index.html \
merge_palette.html \
new_palette.html \
delete_palette.html \
import_palette.html \
merge_palette.html \
new_palette.html \
palette_editor.html
EXTRA_DIST = $(helpdata_DATA)

192
help/C/dialogs/palette_editor/delete_palette.html
View File

@ -1,27 +1,165 @@
<!doctype html public "-//w3c//dtd html 4.0 transitional//en">
<html>
<head>
<META HTTP-EQUIV="Content-Type" CONTENT="text/html; charset=iso-8859-1">
<title>Help Page for delete_palette</title>
</head>
<body text="#000000" bgcolor="#FFFFFF" link="#0000FF"
vlink="#FF0000" alink="#000088">
<table width="100%" cellspacing="1" cellpadding="1">
<tr bgcolor="black">
<td width="100%" align="center">
<font size="+2" color="white">Delete Palette</font>
</td>
</tr>
<tr bgcolor="white" >
<td width="100%" align="left"><P>
<P>
Deletes the selected palette.
<P>
<a href="index.html">Index</a>
</td>
</tr>
</table>
</body>
</html>
<HTML
><HEAD
><TITLE
>Delete Palette</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.49"><LINK
REL="HOME"
TITLE="GIMP User Manual"
HREF="../../contents.html"><LINK
REL="UP"
TITLE="Dialogs"
HREF="../../dialogs/index.html"><LINK
REL="PREVIOUS"
TITLE="The Palette Editor"
HREF="../../dialogs/palette_editor/palette_editor.html"><LINK
REL="NEXT"
TITLE="Import Palette"
HREF="../../dialogs/palette_editor/import_palette.html"></HEAD
><BODY
CLASS="SECT1"
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
TEXT="#000000"
><DIV
CLASS="NAVHEADER"
><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TH
COLSPAN="3"
ALIGN="center"
>GIMP User Manual</TH
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../../dialogs/palette_editor/palette_editor.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="80%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="bottom"
>Chapter 12. Dialogs</TD
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="../../dialogs/palette_editor/import_palette.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="DIALOGS-PALETTE-EDITOR-DELETE-PALETTE"
>Delete Palette</A
></H1
><A
NAME="AEN2653"
></A
><P
> Deletes the selected palette.
</P
><DIV
CLASS="WARNING"
><P
></P
><TABLE
CLASS="WARNING"
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="25"
ALIGN="CENTER"
VALIGN="TOP"
><IMG
SRC="../../../images/warning.gif"
HSPACE="5"
ALT="Warning"></TD
><TD
ALIGN="LEFT"
VALIGN="TOP"
><P
> The palette is deleted from disk too.
</P
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
></DIV
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../../dialogs/palette_editor/palette_editor.html"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../../contents.html"
>Home</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../../dialogs/palette_editor/import_palette.html"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
>The Palette Editor</TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="../../dialogs/index.html"
>Up</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
>Import Palette</TD
></TR
></TABLE
></DIV
></BODY
></HTML
>

Some files were not shown because too many files have changed in this diff Show More